Revit MEP 2010

Imperial Tutorial

March 2009

©

2009 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Disclaimer THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Web Format, Discreet, DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG Extreme, DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, Ecotect, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, Face Robot, FBX, Filmbox, Fire, Flame, Flint, FMDesktop, Freewheel, Frost, GDX Driver, Gmax, Green Building Studio, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HumanIK, IDEA Server, i-drop, ImageModeler, iMOUT, Incinerator, Inferno, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), Kynapse, Kynogon, LandXplorer, LocationLogic, Lustre, Matchmover, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, Moonbox, MotionBuilder, Movimento, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, RasterDWG, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, REALVIZ, Recognize, Render Queue, Retimer,Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, Smoke, Softimage, Softimage|XSI (design/logo), SteeringWheels, Stitcher, Stone, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, TrustedDWG, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Landscape, Visual Survey, Visual Toolbox, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Vtour, Wire, Wiretap, WiretapCentral, XSI, and XSI (design/logo). The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner,Multi-Master Editing, River, and Sparks. The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of MoldflowCorp. in the USA and/or other countries: Moldflow, MPA, MPA (design/logo),Moldflow Plastics Advisers, MPI, MPI (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Insight,MPX, MPX (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Xpert. Third Party Software Program Credits ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002). Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved. ETABS is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc. ETABS © copyright 1984-2005 Computers and Structures, Inc. All rights reserved. RISA is a trademark of RISA Technologies. RISA-3D copyright © 1993-2005 RISA Technologies. All rights reserved.

Portions relating to JPEG © Copyright 1991-1998 Thomas G. Lane. All rights reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Portions relating to TIFF © Copyright 1997-1998 Sam Leffler. © Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. The Tiff portions of this software are provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the copyright owner or contributors of the TIFF portions be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of the TIFF portions of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Portions of Libtiff 3.5.7 Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler. Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics. Portions of Libxml2 2.6.4 Copyright © 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notices and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. Government Use Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
What is in the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Chapter 2

Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Understanding the Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Using the Revit MEP User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Parts of the Revit Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Modifying the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Performing Common Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Chapter 3

Getting Started with MEP Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Creating an MEP Project . . . . . . . . . . Linking Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying a View Template . Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . Modifying General System Options . Specifying File Locations . . . . . . Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 . 30 . 34 . 35 . 35 . 36 . 39 . 40

Creating a Mechanical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Preparing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Placing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Placing a Space in an Open Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

v

Placing a Multi-Level Space . . . . . . . Viewing Zones in the System Browser . . Creating Zones on a Single Level . . . . Creating Zones on Multiple Levels . . . Working with the Analytical Model . . . Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads . Creating a Zone Color Scheme . . . . . Creating an Airflow Schedule . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. 56 . 59 . 60 . 62 . 64 . 69 . 72 . 75

Chapter 5

Designing Mechanical Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Placing Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems . . . . . . . . . Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems . Manually Creating Ductwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 . . 85 . . 92 . . 94 . 102

Chapter 6

Designing a Mechanical Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Adding Mechanical Equipment . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout . . Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout . Adding Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . Sizing Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspecting the System . . . . . . . Checking Piping Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 . 114 . 119 . 128 . 142 . 146 . 149 . 151

Creating an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Specifying Electrical Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Defining Required Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Creating Color Fills and Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

Chapter 8

Designing an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills . Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures . . . . . . . . . Placing Switches, Junction Boxes, and Receptacles . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Switch System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Power Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Panel Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking Your Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 . 177 . 183 . 193 . 200 . 204 . 207 . 211 . 213 . 214

Creating a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Chapter 10

Designing a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Creating a Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

vi | Contents

Refining the Sanitary Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Creating the Cold Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Creating the Hot Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Creating a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Specifying Pipe Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Determining Zone Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Chapter 12

Designing a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Adding Sprinklers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . Completing the Fire Protection Wet System . Adding Vertical Supply Piping . . . . . . . . Modifying Pipe Diameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 . 284 . 289 . 294 . 299

Documenting a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . Creating Dependent Views . . . . . . Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 . 308 . 311 . 315

Chapter 14

Working with Annotations and Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Creating Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 Creating a Legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

Chapter 15

Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail . Creating Detail Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail . . . . . . . . Drafting Detail Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing a CAD Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 . 338 . 348 . 353 . 364

Contents | vii

viii .

Introduction In this tutorial. You also learn how to use the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 user interface to perform common tasks. you learn how to create and set up an MEP project. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to access the tutorial training files. Finally. 1 .

2 .

electrical panels. and where to find the training files required to complete the exercises. electrical. such as duct. This building is also used as the model in the Revit® Architecture and Revit® Structure 2010 tutorials. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit MEP. you learn how to design a building information model (BIM) in Revit MEP.Using the Tutorials 1 This lesson provides information on how to get started with the Revit® MEP 2010 tutorials. 3 . and piping. fixtures. Expand a title for a list of lessons in the tutorial. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit MEP. What is in the Tutorials In these tutorials. such as mechanical equipment. including an overview of the building information model that you design in the tutorials. How the tutorials are organized The tutorials are designed to follow the typical mechanical. Add more detailed modelling elements. The Contents tab of the Revit MEP Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. You complete the following phases of design: ■ ■ ■ Import the architectural floor plan in either a 2D (DWG) or a 3D (RVT) format. and plumbing engineering workflows. Expand a lesson title for a list of exercises in the lesson. The technical training facility you design was a product of a design competition in Munich. Germany. Add basic MEP elements. and plumbing fixtures.

however. as well as how to open and save them. you can choose to save your work. you may notice that MEP elements are included that were not specifically added in an exercise. On the Contents tab. Use the training files A training file is a Revit MEP project that defines a building information model and views of the model that are used to complete the steps in a tutorial. So. For example. you only draw the duct in one wing of the building. Create detail views. Create schedules. Locate the training files The Tutorials option on the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 Help menu provides a link to the installation website for the tutorial content and training files. it is recommended that you begin each exercise by opening the training provided. In this exercise. However. The tutorials include a Training File section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. they are copied to the default location C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2010\Training. is located and accessed in the training files location. Open a training file 1 Click ➤ Open. Metric file names have an _m suffix. You do not design entire systems. Imperial file names have an _i suffix. Each training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. elements such as additional ductwork and equipment are incorporated into subsequent training files. Accessing Training Files Training files are Revit MEP projects. annotations. These elements enhance the exercises you complete. but only enough of a system to learn how to use the tools and options in the product. IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials. the exercises and lessons can be completed in any order. and families that were created specifically for use with the tutorials. After completing each exercise. Training files are grouped into 2 folders within the Training folder: ■ ■ Imperial: files for users working with imperial units. The training files include a starting point for each tutorial exercise. such as templates and families. For example. you learn where the training files are located. Metric: files for users working with metric units. When you open a training file. you can complete any exercise without first completing the preceding exercises. the tutorials are grouped and presented in a recommended order for optimal learning. templates. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system. your Training folder may be in a different location. views.■ ■ ■ Analyze systems and refine MEP elements. all content used in the tutorials is installed in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files. NOTE Depending on your installation. and tags. to provide a richer and more finished design. when you add ductwork. The tutorial exercises are designed to be basic and brief. When you install the training files as instructed. and sheets to document the project. Contact your CAD manager for more information. 4 | Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials .

Click a file type to display the Open dialog for the specified file type.rvt. the Open dialog displays.rvt) is selected. 4 Click the training file name. 3 In the right pane. and click Save. NOTE You are not required to save your work in a training file. and click Open. A training file is provided as a starting point for each exercise. ■ ■ Close a training file 7 Click ➤ Close. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog: ■ For Save in. A good practice is to save the training file with a unique name after you have made changes. For File name. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. you should save this file with a new name such as settings_modified. 8 If you have made changes. Accessing Training Files | 5 . 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. For Files of type. enter the new file name. scroll down. and you can open any supported file type. click ➤ Save As. depending on the instructions in the tutorial.rvt and make changes. a list of file types displays. if you open settings.NOTE If you click the word Open in the menu. you are prompted to save the changes. double-click Imperial or Metric. If you click the arrow to the right of the Open option. For example. You may close the file with or without saving changes. verify that Project Files (*. select the folder in which to save the new file. Save a training file 5 To save a training file with a new name. and click the Training Files icon.

6 .

the floor or roof remains connected. You learn the terminology. Revit MEP collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. As you work in drawing and schedule views. In mathematics and mechanical CAD. and plans. the hierarchy of elements. and how to perform some common tasks in the product. drawings. In this case. This capability delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit MEP: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project. The following are examples of these element relationships: ■ The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. the operation of the software is parametric. ■ ■ 7 . and Revit MEP coordinates that change through the entire project. drawing sheets. 2D and 3D view. the door retains this relationship to the partition. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. In this case. the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. If the length of the elevation is changed. Understanding the Concepts What is Autodesk Revit MEP 2010? The Revit MEP platform for building information modelling is a design and documentation system that supports the design. schedules. sections. the parameter is one of association or connection. and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. hence. Building information modelling (BIM) delivers information about project design. In the Revit MEP model. quantities. every drawing sheet. and schedules required for a building project. and phases when you need it. the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters. What is meant by parametric? The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the design that enable the coordination and change management that Revit MEP provides. You begin with the fundamental concepts on which Revit MEP is built. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved. the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. you learn what Revit MEP is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. scope. The Revit MEP parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views. If you move the partition.Understanding the Basics 2 In this lesson.

For example. dimensions. They display in relevant views of the design. Model components are all the other types of elements in the building model. For example. Revit MEP uses 2 key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. Datum elements help to define project context. and 2D detail components are view-specific elements. tags. sprinklers. For example. ■ 8 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics .How does Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 keep things updated? A fundamental characteristic of a building information modelling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. For example. ■ ■ There are 2 types of model elements: ■ Hosts (or host elements) are generally built in place at the construction site. sprinklers. For example. and 2D detail components. They help to describe or document the design. boilers. For example. and keynotes are annotation elements. dimensions. and electrical panels. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do. sinks. Revit MEP uses 3 types of elements: ■ Model elements represent the actual 3D geometry of the building. filled regions. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. ducts. Element behavior in a parametric modeler In projects. Details are 2D items that provide details about the building model in a particular view. sinks. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. ducts. without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design. and electrical panels. Examples include detail lines. levels. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. boilers. and reference planes are datum elements. When you change something. View-specific elements display only in the views in which they are placed. ■ There are 2 types of view-specific elements: ■ Annotation elements are 2D components that document the model and maintain scale on paper. Revit MEP immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. grids. walls and ceilings are hosts. tags.

Categories of annotation elements include tags and symbols. and ceilings. categories of model elements include mechanical equipment and air terminals. floors. Revit MEP classifies elements by categories. section views. elevation views. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building. schedules. Revit MEP makes it easy for you to alter the design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. Revit MEP elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly. some terms are unique to Revit MEP. This information includes components used to design the model. Understanding Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 terms Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit MEP are common. programming is not required. In other cases. Often. first floor. If you can draw. Most often. Category: A category is a group of elements that you use to model or document a building design. industry-standard terms familiar to most engineers. Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. and types.Elevation View Element: When creating a project. top of wall. the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. To place levels. By using a single project file. from geometry to construction data. by locking a dimension or aligning to walls. and drawings of the design. you can explicitly control them. such as roofs. Understanding the Concepts | 9 . families. In Revit MEP. and so forth). you do nothing to establish these relationships. Understanding the following terms is crucial to understanding the software. they are implied by what you do and how you draw. However. you can define new parametric elements in Revit MEP. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements. the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the structure. The project file contains all information for the building design. you must be in a section or elevation view. for example. views of the project. or bottom of foundation. you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a structure. Project: In Revit MEP. For example. you add Revit MEP parametric building elements to the design.This implementation provides flexibility for designers. North .

A family groups elements with a common set of parameters (properties). such as a 30” X 42” title block. Then experiment with them. Using the Revit MEP User Interface Revit MEP is a powerful CAD product for the Microsoft® Windows operating system. pipes. They are not available for loading or creating as separate files. and wires. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. ■ ■ In-place families are custom families that you create in the context of a project. Read the following topics to familiarize yourself with the basic parts of the Revit interface. For example. For example. and rearranging interface components to support the way that you work. the behavior of a plumbing fitting is predefined in the system. a lighting fixture could be considered one family. Type: Each family can have several types.Family: Families are classes of elements in a category. and similar graphical representation. you can set the ribbon to one of the three display settings for optimum use of the interface. or layer the views to see only the one on top. ■ Because in-place families are intended for limited use in a project. showing. However. each in-place family contains only a single type. System families include ducts. 10 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties. ■ ■ ■ Revit MEP predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. You can create multiple in-place families in your projects. but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. System families can be transferred between projects. identical use. There are 3 kinds of families: ■ Loadable families can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. For example. although the pendant lights that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. With a few clicks. Unlike system and standard component families. Its interface resembles those of other products for Windows featuring a ribbon that contains the tools used to complete tasks. Create an in-place family when your project needs unique geometry that you do not expect to reuse or geometry that must maintain one of more relationships to other project geometry. Parts of the Revit Interface The Revit MEP interface is designed to simplify your workflow. A type can be a specific size of a family. you can change the interface to better support the way that you work. A type can also be a style. you can create different types of fittings with different compositions. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. hiding. Instance: Instances are the actual items (individual elements) that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the design (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances). You can also display several project views at one time. such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. and you can place copies of the same in-place family element in your projects. you cannot duplicate in-place family types to create multiple types.

To minimize the ribbon 1 Click (Show Full Ribbon) to the right of the ribbon tabs. or moving a panel off the ribbon to your desktop. Parts of the Revit Interface | 11 . click the Return Panels to Ribbon button. Minimize to Tabs: Shows tab labels. Minimize to Panel Tiles: Shows tab and panel labels. To return the panel to the ribbon. The ribbon can be minimized for maximum use of the drawing area. you can click the top (or left) side to access the tool you probably use most often. or drag the panel back to its original ribbon tab. Click a panel label and drag the panel off the ribbon to the desktop. To move panels: ■ ■ Click a panel label and drag the panel to a desired place on the ribbon.Ribbon Overview The ribbon displays automatically when you create or open a file. Ribbon Tabs and Panels TIP When you see a button that shows a line dividing it into two sides. Click the other side to expose a list of other related tools. 2 The minimize behavior cycles through the following minimize options: ■ ■ ■ Show Full Ribbon: Shows entire ribbon. and provides all the tools necessary to create your file. Customize the ribbon by changing the panel order.

There are a number of button types on the ribbon Ribbon Tab Home Includes commands for. architect-specific tools. select the tool first. and settings. tools used for running analysis on the current design. many of the tools you need to create the MEP design. tools for collaboration with internal and external project team members. third-party tools used with Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. then select what you want to modify. project and system parameters. tools used for editing existing elements. tools to add and manage secondary items such as raster images.. data and systems. tools used for adding 2D information to a design. The Add-Ins tab is enabled only when a third-party tool is installed. tools used for managing and modifying the current view. and CAD files.Examples of button that can be clicked on two sides The following table describes the ribbon tabs and the types of commands they contain. many of the tools you need to create and modify a family of elements. Create (family files only) Insert Annotate Modify Analyze Architect Collaborate View Manage Add-Ins 12 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . When working on the Modify tab.. and for switching views.

To keep a panel expanded. displays frequently used tools. For example. Contextual Ribbon Tabs When you execute certain commands or select an element. Element: contains Element Properties and the Type Selector. displays information related to the current state of a Revit operation. Application Frame Overview The application frame contains tools and provides feedback to help you manage your Revit MEP projects. an expanded panel closes automatically when you click another panel. closes the application menu (double-click). provides requested information. The application frame consists of five main areas described in the following table: Application Window Tool Description opens the application menu (single -click). provides access to common tools. A dialog-launcher arrow on the bottom of a panel opens a dialog.Expanded Panels A drop-down arrow at the bottom of a panel indicates that you can expand the panel to display additional tools and controls. This contextual ribbon tab closes once you end the command. Placement Tools: contains the placement tools necessary for placing and connecting duct. application button application menu Quick Access toolbar InfoCenter Status Bar Parts of the Revit Interface | 13 . when adding duct. a Place Duct contextual tab displays that has three panels: ■ ■ ■ Selection: contains the Modify command. click the push pin icon in the bottom-left corner of the expanded panel. By default. a special contextual ribbon tab displays that contains a set of tools that relate only to the context of the command.

. Click to access the application menu and perform the following actions: to. such as Export and Publish.. NOTE Revit MEP options are set from Options on the application menu.The Application Menu The application menu provides access to many common file actions and also allows you to manage your files using more advanced commands. (Open) save the current drawing. Access common tools to start or publish a file in the application menu. select a file to open.. (Save) save the current drawing with a new name. click. select a template and create a new drawing. (Save As) export the current drawing.. (New) 14 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . (Export) On the application menu.

(Save) (Undo) (Redo) (Modify) (Synchronize and Modify Settings) (3D View) (Customize Quick Access Toolbar) Parts of the Revit Interface | 15 . or template file. to.. (Print) access product and license information. enters selection mode and ends the current operation. saves a current project. or template file. (Close) Using the Quick Access Toolbar The Quick Access toolbar contains the following items by default: Quick Access Toolbar Item (Open) Description opens a project. family. customizes the items displayed on the Quick Access toolbar.. NOTE New displays on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down. synchronizes a local file with that on the central server. family. (Licensing) close the file. Camera.. (Publish) print the current drawing. annotation. click. provides views including Default 3D.On the application menu. reinstates the last cancelled action and displays a list of all reinstated actions performed during the session. To enable or disable a tool item. publish the current project. annotation. click next to it on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down.. but is not enabled by default. cancels the last action by default and displays a list of all actions taken during the session. and Walkthrough.

Editable Only: Filters selections to select only editable. or View Graphics panels persist on the toolbar for that mode. In addition. NOTE There are some tools on contextual tabs that cannot be added to the Quick Access toolbar. It often displays tips or hints about what to do next for the current command. Active Only: Filters selections to select only active design option components.To undo or redo a series of operations. items that are added to the Quick Access toolbar from the Create. the left side of the Status Bar provides tips or hints on what to do. the Status Bar displays the name of the family and type. To show the Status Bar again. displaying the same information. Status Bar The Status Bar is located along the bottom of the Revit MEP application frame. Group. However. Click Show Below the Ribbon on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar to change the display setting. Starting with the most recent command. Modify. Getting Hints About What to Do Next If you start a command (such as Rotate) and are not sure what to do next. When you are using a command. Filter button: Displays how many elements are selected and refines the element categories selected in a view. when you switch to another editing mode. While in an edit mode (such as Modify Electrical Fixtures). repeat the command. check the Status Bar. workshared components. Exclude Options: Filters selections to exclude components that are part of a design option. Clear the Status Bar check mark. Clipboard. you can select any number of previous commands to include in the Undo or Redo operation. click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down. To hide the Status Bar. these items do not display and need to be re-added to the Quick Access toolbar. click the drop-down to the right of the Undo and Redo buttons. Several other controls appear on the right side of the Status Bar ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Press & Drag: Allows you to click and drag an element without it selecting first. The Quick Access toolbar can display below the ribbon. a tool tip appears next to the cursor. When you are highlighting an element or component. This displays the command history in a list. 16 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . or the Family Editor.

View Control Bar The View Control Bar is located at the bottom of the Revit window above the Status Bar. including the following: Parts of the Revit Interface | 17 . use the Type Selector to specify the type of element to add. click (Modify). Type Selector The Type Selector is located on the Element panel for the currently invoked tool. Place a Wall. To change existing elements to a different type. Then use the Type Selector to select the desired type. It provides quick access to functions that affect the drawing area. do either of the following: ■ ■ Press ESC twice. When you place an element in a drawing. On the Quick Access toolbar. Options Bar The Options Bar is located below the ribbon. select one or more elements of the same category. Its contents change depending on the current function or selected elements. for example.To cancel or exit the current command. Its contents change depending on the current command or selected element.

Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the MEP design in the window. you learn how to modify the views within your Revit MEP project. There are several ways to access zoom options.) The zoom menu lists the zoom options. For example. (The Navigation bar is located in the top-right corner of the view. Zoom the view In the tutorials. click Training Files. 1 Click ➤ Open. you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire structure or floor plan in the view. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Scale Detail Level Model Graphics Style Shadows On/Off Show/Hide Rendering Dialog (Available only when the drawing area displays a 3D view. Crop View On/Off Show/Hide Crop Region Temporary Hide/Isolate Reveal Hidden Elements Modifying the View In this exercise. 18 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . In the following steps. After you are familiar with these tasks. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_i. The 3D isometric view displays: 3 Click Navigation bar ➤ Zoom In Region drop-down to display the zoom menu.rvt. you open a training file and practice adjusting the view with the different zoom commands. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog.

The view of the MEP design is sized to fit the available window. If you do not have a wheel mouse. the view zooms out from the mechanical piping design. Zoom is also available using SteeringWheels. click . NOTE As you zoom in and out. NOTE If the Navigation bar is not currently displayed click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and select Navigation bar. and enter the shortcut ZR to zoom in on a region. this is referred to as a crossing selection. 4 Click Zoom Out (2x). When you release the mouse button. To modify or add snap increments. 8 If you use a mouse that has a wheel as the middle button. SteeringWheels provide 2D and 3D navigation tools. The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. In the drawing area. Revit MEP uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. you can roll the wheel to zoom the view. Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire structure again. 9 To display SteeringWheels.NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself activates the currently-selected zoom command. Modifying the View | 19 . on the Navigation bar. 5 Click Zoom To Fit. 7 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region to magnify. click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. the view zooms in on the selected area. 6 Click in the drawing area. use a zoom menu command to zoom out.

Click and drag to orbit the design. You can change the pivot point by releasing the mouse button. press ESC. For more information about SteeringWheels. moving the wheel to the desired location. click 16 Click the Top compass direction indicator to switch to a Top view of the design.The Full Navigation wheel displays in the drawing area. 11 Click and hold the mouse button. the wheel follows the cursor around the drawing area. Reorient the view You can use the View Cube in 3D views to spin the design or reorient the view 15 Place the mouse cursor over the South compass portion of the ViewCube to highlight the direction indicator. 12 Drag the cursor down or left to zoom out. click the SteeringWheels tab. To define settings for SteeringWheels. press F1 while the steering wheel is displayed. 14 To exit the wheel. 20 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . 10 Move the cursor over the Zoom wedge of the wheel so that it highlights. and then using the Zoom tool again. The cursor displays a pivot point for the Zoom tool. 13 Drag the cursor up or right to zoom in. ➤ Options. As you move the mouse. and click tin the Options dialog.

When drawing or modifying an MEP design. and tops of selected elements in elevation views and 3D views. These are the drag controls. Performing Common Tasks In this exercise.17 Click the Home icon to return to the original view. called drag controls. bottoms. as shown. zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan. and select the duct.Design. and open Level 2 . display along the ends.Design ➤ Floor Plans. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . referred to as shape handles. After you are familiar with these tasks. Similar controls. you learn to perform some of the common Revit MEP tasks that are included in the tutorials. display at the ends of selected objects in a plan view. Performing Common Tasks | 21 . it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area. Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the duct. 2 Enter ZR. Small blue dots. Resize an element using drag controls 1 In the Project Browser.HVAC Plan .

moving the cursor up to shorten the duct. Selecting the second item in the list will undo the last 2 actions. All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command. In this example. select the first item in the list.3 Click and drag the bottom control. 6 On the Undo menu. Move. Undo commands 5 On the Quick Access toolbar. on the Standard toolbar. click the drop-down menu next to (Undo). 22 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . NOTE To quickly undo the previous action. All changes you make to a project are tracked. Move an element 7 Select the same duct used in the previous steps. click the Undo command. you decide that you prefer to leave the duct as is. 4 Click in the drawing area to deselect the duct. The Undo command allows you to reverse the effects of one or more commands. or press CTRL+Z.

and drag it to the left as shown. The duct is moved to the new position. and click again to specify the ending position. After selecting the element to move. 9 Click the midpoint of the duct. as shown. Performing Common Tasks | 23 . 10 Move the cursor to the right. In this case. 11 With the duct already selected. click to specify the starting position.8 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. Some commands. you want to move the duct. such as Move and Copy. require 2 clicks to complete the command. for example. Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location.

Supply. stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command. you can also: ■ ■ Choose another command. you can specify visibility settings for specific elements in an HVAC plan in order to enable the display of supply duct and disable the display of return duct. 16 On the Quick Access toolbar. Press ESC twice. such as the Modify Ducts command. Select Mechanical . Override the display of objects You can control the visibility of objects in a view to display objects in specific ways. under Visibility: ■ ■ ■ Clear Mechanical .End a command Some commands. (Undo) to redisplay the 24 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . Click OK. 14 Enter VG. 15 On the Filters tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. 13 To end a command. Notice that the return air duct is not displayed.Return. click the drop-down menu next to supply return air duct. 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. For example.

17 Close the file without saving your changes. Performing Common Tasks | 25 .

26 .

The first step in creating your office template is deciding which template to use as your starting point. link files. settings. and open Imperial ➤ Templates. 5 In the New Project dialog. and geometry from the starting template. Creating an MEP Project In this exercise. create and manage views. select Project. 27 . 4 Select the i_Tutorial-Default. 2 In the New Project dialog. you learn how to start a project from a template.Getting Started with MEP Projects 3 In this lesson you learn how to start a project from a template. you can modify one template and use Transfer Project Standards to copy the changes to the other templates. you learn how to organize the project browser to make it easy to view and access your project files. such as ducts and pipes. under Template file. system families. In that case. You can choose from several templates. or you can save a project and use it as a new project template. click Browse. A project template enables you to start a project by providing initial conditions. You then learn how to customize the template by modifying the project settings and discipline settings. use copy/monitor. 6 Click OK. New projects inherit all the families. under Create new.rte template. and click Open. such as coordination review and interference checking. Start a project from an existing template 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. The template selection may vary depending on your installation. such as the default project units and settings. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. the default building levels and standard views. Finally. You can either select a template from the template library. and loadable families. You may need to have a variety of office templates if your work requires it. click Training files. You also learn how to use collaboration tools. and modify system settings.

click Edit. 18 In the Project Parameters dialog. zoom to right side of the drawing area to view the level heads. Notice that construction template is more complex than the default template and the view properties have been modified to maximize the use of various tools.rte template and click Open. For example. Click Cancel. create another new project using the Construction template. To maintain office standards and reduce rework. Click OK twice. 28 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . 13 In the New Project dialog: Under Template file. select Project template. you can select the materials commonly used in most projects. 14 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. ■ ■ For Ground Plane. NH. Modify project settings Project settings control the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. under Energy Analysis. 9 Close the file with or without saving it. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ On the Place tab. select School or University. 10 Using the same method. for City. click ■ ■ In the Building Construction dialog. 17 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. for Energy Data. TIP This template is the starting point for your new template.7 In the Project Browser. select Level 1. you can select it now. When you select the material. select Manchester. (Browse). 16 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. and select the Systems-Default_Imperial. For Location. you can establish settings that are common to most projects. Some templates are simple with respect to the predefined views and schedules. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). Create a new project template based on the default systems template 12 Click ■ ■ ➤ New ➤ Project. ■ ■ Under Create new. navigate to Imperial Templates. ■ For Building Construction. 8 In the drawing area. In the Choose Template dialog. you can dictate its appearance in all views and when rendered. click Browse. Click OK. review the construction materials listed. click (Browse). If you want to use a template other than the default. select Sub-Discipline and click Modify. and open North.

plumbing. 24 In the right pane. 4 1/2". 25 In the left pane. Modify electrical settings Electrical settings determine the voltage. 30 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. under Duct Settings. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. 10 1/2". 29 In the Load Family dialog: ■ ■ Browse to the Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks folder. and 5 1/2". 4 1/2".19 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Group parameter under. select Identity Data. 11 1/2". click Round. Discipline settings can be defined for electrical and mechanical disciplines. power distribution systems. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. 22 In the right pane. under Duct Settings. For Ground Wire Tick Mark. click Sizes. for 3 1/2". wiring. After standard settings have been established for an organization. and demand factors for electrical systems. Duct sizes that are not commonly used are removed from the sizing lists to avoid having them created when sizing or laying out ducts. click Wiring. ensure that Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. they can be configured in a template file to avoid having to set them for each project. 5 1/2". For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. Click OK twice. ensure that Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. 31 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. 26 In the right pane. select I_Hook Wire Tick Mark. For Categories. 28 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. 23 In the left pane. piping. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. 33 Click OK.rfa and click Open. Define the tick marks that are used on wires by loading a family. 21 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. click Rectangular. under Pipe Settings. Modify mechanical settings Revit MEP has discipline settings that define the appearance and behavior of the system components in a project. for 3/4". Mechanical settings determine the behavior and appearance of the ductwork and piping for mechanical. and fire protection systems. ensure that Hook Wire Tick Mark is selected. select Views. Creating an MEP Project | 29 .rfa and I_Long Wire Tick Mark. 27 Click OK. 32 In the right pane: ■ ■ ■ For Hot Wire Tick Mark. and 12 1/2". 20 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. for 3 1/2". Holding CTRL.

36 On the Folders tab of the Browser Organization Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Group by. An architect has created a preliminary architectural model for a building project using Revit Architecture. You can use these techniques to create templates that are customized to your projects. 37 Save this file to a location on your local system. and adjust the display settings of the Revit Architecture project. under Template file. For Then by. For Sort by. You need to create the MEP model for the project. 35 On the Views tab of the Browser Organization dialog. 5 Click OK. In addition. you can specify the order in which the views and sheets are displayed in the Project Browser. you link a Revit Architecture project to a Revit MEP project. Click Open. Select Imperial\Arch Link Model_i. 4 In the New Project dialog. Create a new project using the template created in the previous lesson 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. 30 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects .rvt. 3 Select the template you saved in the previous exercise and click Open. 2 In the New Project dialog. select View Name. 34 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and click Browser Organization. Link a file 6 Click Insert tab ➤ Link panel ➤ Link Revit. select Associated Level. 38 Close the file. select Family and Type. select Project.Organize the Project Browser The Project Browser lists all the views. From the Positioning list. Close coordination between the two models is essential because the building envelope changes will directly affect the MEP design. synchronize the two models for monitoring changes. For Then by. 7 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. click Browse. To enable this coordination. Select Ascending Click OK twice. select Type/Discipline and click Edit. click Training. you link the architectural model with the MEP model. sheets.Origin to Origin. You can also set filters to determine the number of views and sheets that are displayed. and groups that are contained in a project. Linking Projects In this exercise. under Create new. families. select Sub-Discipline. You can customize the organization of project views and sheets in the Project Browser to group them into folders. Notice that the file is saved as a template. select Auto .

The architectural model links to the MEP model and the current view remains active. 8 If necessary, reposition elevations in the plan view as shown.

Enable bounding elements for spaces 9 In the drawing area, select the linked architectural model. 10 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. 11 In the Type Properties dialog, under Constraints, select Room Bounding. 12 Click OK. 13 Press ESC to deselect the linked model. Add levels 14 Expand Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? and open North - Mech. 15 Zoom to the right side of the building to view the levels.

Linking Projects | 31

16 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. 17 On the Options Bar, click Plan View types. 18 In the Plan View Types dialog, verify that Ceiling Plan and Floor Plan are selected and click OK. 19 On the left side of the view, click the level line for 03- Floor. 20 Move the cursor to the right side of the view and click to insert the level line for Mechanical 3. 21 Repeat the previous steps to create another level line for the roof. 22 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Adjust level lines You can adjust the level lines in the MEP design to match the level lines in the architectural model. 23 Select the level line for Level 2 and click the value.

24 Enter 12 and press ENTER. 25 Repeat the previous steps to adjust the level line for Level 2.

32 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

Monitor the architectural levels You can monitor the elements within a Revit MEP model, and when the monitored elements are not synchronized, warnings notify you of any violations. These violations happen when the original monitored element from the linked project has changed, a copied monitored element in the host project has changed, or both original monitored and copied elements have changed. Warnings may also appear when the original element in the linked file is deleted or the copied element in the host file is deleted. Using the Copy/Monitor tool, you can copy elements within a current project or from a linked project to a host project. This establishes a relationship between the copied and original elements, which helps monitor changes to the original element and report differences. After copying, appears above the copied elements, indicating that a relationship is established, and that the copied elements are monitored. If you modify a monitored element, a warning message displays, indicating that an element has changed. 26 Click Collaborate tab ➤ Coordinate panel ➤ Copy/Monitor drop-down ➤ Select Link. 27 In the drawing area, highlight the linked model, and click to select the linked model. The Copy/Monitor tab is displayed. 28 Click Copy/Monitor tab ➤ Tools panel ➤ Monitor. 29 In the drawing area, click the MEP level line labeled Level 1, then click the architectural model level line labeled 01-Entry Level. appears and the monitor tool ensures that both level lines remain coordinated. 30 Repeat the previous steps to monitor the level lines for level 2, level 3, and the level 4. 31 On the Copy/Monitor tab, click Finish to exit the Copy/Monitor tool. Disable the display of architectural levels 32 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 33 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog, for the link file, click By Host View. 34 On the Basics tab, of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog, click Custom. 35 On the Annotation Categories tab:

For Annotation Categories, select Custom.

Linking Projects | 33

■ ■ ■

Select Show categories from all disciplines. Under Visibility, deselect Levels. Click OK.

36 Click OK.

Creating and Applying a View Template
In this exercise, you create a view template and apply it to your project template. Create a view template 1 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ View Templates drop-down ➤ Create template from current view. 2 In the New View Template dialog, for Name, enter Mechanical View and click OK. 3 In the View templates dialog, under View Properties, for V/G Overrides RVT Links, click Edit. 4 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility Graphics Override dialog, for the link file, click Custom. 5 On the Basics tab, of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog, click Custom. 6 On the Model Categories tab:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Model Categories, select Custom. Select Show categories from all disciplines. Under Visibility, deselect Parking, Planting, Roads, Site, and Topography. Click OK.

7 Click OK twice. Apply a view template 8 In the Project Browser, right-click Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? ➤ North - Mechanical and click Apply View Template.

34 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

9 In the Apply View Template dialog, under View Templates, select Mechanical and click OK.

10 Close the file with or without saving your changes.

Modifying System Settings
In this exercise, you learn how to control the system settings for Revit MEP. System settings are local to each computer and applied to all projects; they are not saved to project files or template files.

Modifying General System Options
In this exercise, you modify the settings that control your local Revit MEP working environment. These settings control the graphics, selection default options, notification preferences, journal cleanup options, and your username when using worksharing. Set graphics settings 1 Click ➤ Options.

2 In the Options dialog, click the Graphics tab. 3 Under Colors, select Invert background color, and click OK. 4 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new project.

5 In the New Project dialog, under Template file, click Browse. 6 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\Templates\i_Tutorial_Default.rte. 7 Click OK. Notice that the drawing area is black. 8 Click ➤ Options.

9 In the Options dialog, click the Graphics tab.

Modifying System Settings | 35

10 Under Colors, click the value for Selection color. 11 In the Color dialog, select yellow, and click OK. NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color. When an error occurs, the elements causing the error display using this color. 12 Click the General tab. 13 Under Notifications, specify the following options:
■ ■

For Save reminder interval, select One hour. For Tooltip assistance, select None.

14 Click OK. 15 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. 16 Sketch a straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area. 17 Press ESC to end the command. 18 Select the wall.

Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red. 19 Press ESC to end the command. 20 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it. Notice that a tooltip is not displayed. However, the Status Bar displays information about the highlighted element. 21 Close the file without saving it.

Specifying File Locations
In this exercise, you specify default file locations. These settings control locations of important Revit MEP files, including your default project template, family template files, and family libraries. Set file locations 1 Click ➤ Options.

2 In the Options dialog, click the File Locations tab. 3 Under Default template file, click Browse.

36 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

Notice that you can choose an industry-specific template as your default template.

TIP To view a template, you can start a new project with that template. Click and click Browse to select a template. 4 Click Cancel. 5 Under Default path for user files, click Browse.

➤ New ➤ Project,

6 In the Browse For Folder dialog, select the folder to save your files to by default, and click Open. 7 In the Options dialog, under Default path for family template files, click Browse. This path is set automatically during the installation process. These are the family templates that you use to create new families. It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path. However, there are some circumstances where you may need to modify the path, such as in a large, centralized, MEP firm where customized templates reside on a network drive. 8 Click Cancel. Specify library settings and create a new library 9 In the Options dialog, click Places. 10 In the Places dialog, note the list of library names. The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation. Each library path points Revit MEP to a folder of families or training files. You can modify the existing library names and path, and you can create new libraries. An icon for each library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open, Save, Load, and Import dialogs.

When you are opening, saving, or loading a Revit MEP file, you can click on the library folder located in the left pane of the dialog. In the following illustration, notice that the libraries display as icons in the left pane of the dialog.

Specifying File Locations | 37

18 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and select it as the library path. click the My Library icon.11 In the Places dialog. 13 Click in the Library Path field for My Library. The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open. templates. and change the name to My Library. or families. TIP You may want to create a new folder first. 15 Under Library Name. The library icons display in the order in which they are listed in the Options dialog. click My Library. 38 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . and Import dialogs. and click OK twice. Save. and click (Browse). ➤ Open. and click Open. 14 Navigate to C:\My Documents or a folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit MEP projects. 16 Click 17 Click (Move Rows Up) until My Library is at the top of the list. 12 Click in the Library Name field of the new library. Load. click (Add Value).

click OK. you can specify the locations of other files used to define render appearances. If you want to relocate this path. 4 Under Personal dictionary contains words added during spell check. 15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. This path is determined during installation. Specify rendering settings 25 Click the Rendering tab. 26 Under Render Appearance Library Location. 3 Under Settings. click Edit. 19 Click Cancel. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. 8 Under Building industry dictionary. view the current path. This path specifies the location of the Render Appearance Library. and decal image files. 11 In the Options dialog. 13 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. Under Additional Render Appearance Paths. scroll down to view the list of building industry terms. you modify the spelling settings and the custom dictionaries for Revit MEP. 5 In the text editor. click Places. Specifying Spelling Options In this exercise. and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU. Specifying Spelling Options | 39 . such as bump maps. click Edit. 9 In the text editor.Notice that Revit MEP navigates directly to the library path. 10 Click File menu ➤ Exit. 12 Create a new project using the default template. 27 Click OK. It allowed SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase. 14 Click in the drawing area. 21 On the File Locations tab. 23 Click 24 Click OK. If you work in a large office. 7 Click File menu ➤ Exit. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. (Remove Value) to delete the library. enter sheetmtl-Cu. 2 In the Options dialog. you may want to set up an office library on a network path to increase productivity and maintain office standards. 20 Click ➤ Options. click the Spelling tab. 22 Select My Library. 16 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Spelling. select Ignore words in uppercase. custom color files. Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary. specify the new location here. Modify spelling settings 1 Click ➤ Options.

Modifying Snap Settings In this exercise. click File menu ➤ Save. 25 Close the file without saving it. 19 In the Options dialog. or use the shortcut keys to force a particular snap method. Modify snap increments 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit MEP project. 22 In the text editor. 4 In the New Project dialog. 5 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. and enter 1 . click OK. click the Spelling tab. Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments. 18 Click ➤ Options. As you zoom in and out within a view. 24 In the Options dialog. In this exercise. click Close. you modify snap settings. You can turn snap settings on and off. and open Imperial\Templates\i_Tutorial_Default. click OK.17 In the Spelling dialog. under Dimension Snaps. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. and then click File menu ➤ Exit. you modify snap increments. click Browse. delete sheetmtl-CU. under Template file. 20 Under Settings. 2 In the New Project dialog. and use shortcut keys to control snapping on an instance basis. 40 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . click Restore Defaults. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. You can add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it. Revit MEP uses the largest increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. Snap settings are system settings that are applied to all projects and not saved within a project file. 21 Under Personal dictionary. click Training Files. click Edit. 23 In the text editor. This command resets the spelling settings to their original configuration. work with snapping turned off. 6 In the Snaps dialog.rte.. click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 4’ .

snapping reverts to the system default settings. A listening dimension refers to the dimension that displays while you are sketching. TIP To zoom while sketching. if you want to snap an object to a wall midpoint. This dimension reacts to the movement of the cursor and numerical keyboard entries. 8 In the Snaps dialog. you can right-click and select a zoom option from the shortcut menu. 11 Click in the center of the drawing area. Sketch without snapping 13 While sketching the wall. 12 While sketching a generic straight wall. and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you commit an action. zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to 1’. If you do not have a wheel button. Notice that when snapping is turned off completely. and move the cursor to the right. If it does not. Modifying Snap Settings | 41 . use the wheel button on your mouse. zoom out until it does so. After you click to place the object at the midpoint. While sketching. deselect Chain. notice the 2-letter acronyms next to each object snap option. such as ZO to zoom out. click OK. you can also use the zoom shortcut keys.7 Under Object Snaps. For example. This is the increment that you added previously. 9 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. Notice that the listening dimension snaps at 4’ increments. enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off. 10 On the Options Bar. the listening dimension reflects the exact length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right. enter SM. You can use these shortcut keys at any time when working on the design.

. and specify the wall endpoint. When you use shortcut keys to control snapping. and the wall edges. and move the cursor to the right. 15 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall. Notice that snapping is once again active. Use snapping shortcut keys 16 Click Place Wall tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Do not set the wall end point. 24 Under Dimension Snaps. click in the Length dimension snap increments box. 26 Close the file. 18 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously. 21 Click to start the wall at the midpoint.14 Click to set the wall endpoint. the command is only active for one click of the mouse. If you move the cursor along the wall. This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints. 19 Enter SM. Make sure you also delete the semicolon. 22 Move the cursor downward. the midpoint. Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall. 23 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. and delete the value 1’ . with or without saving it. 25 Click OK. 42 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . 17 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. 20 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall. it will snap to the endpoints.

Creating a Mechanical System In this tutorial. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan mechanical systems. 43 . You also learn how to design a mechanical air system and a mechanical piping system.

44 .

water source heat pump (WSHP). you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis to determine the heating and cooling requirements for the building. and then you create a plenum level. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. you first configure the linked architectural model. you will understand the process. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to design a mechanical system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. go to http://www. After finishing each exercise.Planning Mechanical Systems 4 In this tutorial. By following the recommended workflow. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. you learn best practices for system design while understanding how Revit MEP makes systems design more efficient. you first plan the system. Because most MEP engineers work with a linked model during system design. Then you assign zones to the spaces in order to control the spatial environment. To create a mechanical system in Revit MEP. This system consists of a cooling tower. 45 . In this exercise.autodesk. As you create the mechanical system. methodology. After applying a color scheme to the zones. you design a mechanical system for an office building. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. you follow a series of lessons and exercises that teach the recommended system design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. you begin planning the system by placing spaces in the building. Preparing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. In this lesson. This workflow begins with system planning and concludes with system designing. At the end of the tutorial. However. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. and specific techniques for designing mechanical systems. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. If the tutorial training files are not present. duct system and a hydronic piping system. you can choose to save your work. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. you prepare a floor plan so that you can place spaces in later exercises.

and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_01_i. and ceiling) are defined as room-bounding. These components are defined in the architectural training file. roof. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. This makes the architectural components (such as walls. 3 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. In this section. Next. select Room Bounding. and after the linked model highlights. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Place the cursor over the linked model.Space Plan is highlighted. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . click to select it. click Training Files. you add a level for plenums. you configure a linked model in order to begin designing systems in it. make certain that architectural elements (such as walls. Configure the linked model for space bounding The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. and floors) recognized as boundaries for spaces. The status bar located at the bottom of the window and the tooltip indicate the Linked Revit Model. under Constraints. indicating that it’s the active view. You must place spaces in all areas (occupied and unoccupied) of the building to create an accurate analytical model and achieve an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. ceilings. 1 In the Project Browser. not in the MEP training file. 5 Press Esc to clear the selection. The linked model is configured to place spaces using the linked building geometry to define the space volume. Add a Plenum level You create plenum levels so that you can place spaces in the unoccupied plenum areas (between the ceiling and the floor above) of the building. NOTE When working with a linked file. and click OK. 46 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.rvt.

9 On the Draw panel.6 In the Project Browser. and select Level : Plenum from the Type Selector drop-down. click Yes (this will happen every time you create a new level). A black datum indicates a reference level (the level is not taken into account during the creation of a view template). A new plenum floor plan view named Level 2 Plenum is created. This creates only a floor plan after the level is added. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ MEP . 7 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. offset by the Offset value (8' 0" ) above level 2. ■ 11 Draw a plenum level above Level 2 as follows: ■ ■ Click the left endpoint of the Level 2 line to specify the start point of the plenum level. 15 When asked to rename the corresponding level and views. and click OK. and double-click West . 14 Double-click the level name (Level 4). enter 8'. The new level is placed. Verify that Make Plan View is selected. 16 Press Esc. For Offset. verify that only Floor Plan is selected. and a blue datum indicates that a plan view exists for the level. and is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Floor Plans. 13 Zoom in on the right side of the elevation view.Design ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation).MEP. Because you have not yet specified the view classification or sub-discipline properties. and enter Level 2 Plenum. Preparing Spaces | 47 . Click the right endpoint of the Level 2 line. 12 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. and in the Plan View Types dialog. Click Plan View Types. 8 Click Place Level tab ➤ Element panel. those categories in the Project Browser are listed as question marks. click 10 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ (Line).

enter 0. For Sub-Discipline. ■ Click OK twice. and click Properties. In this exercise. and for Offset. select MEP . NOTE After finishing each exercise. for View Range. You apply the default view template so that only the architectural floor plan displays. and then place spaces in various types of areas. For Cut plane. Under Identity Data. Apply a view template 19 Open the Level 2 Plenum view. and click Apply Default View Template. it is highly recommended that you always begin each exercise by opening the training file that Autodesk provides. for Default View Template. click Edit. you can choose to save your work.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans in the Project Browser. 21 Close the file with or without saving it. select Level Above (Level 3). The view graphics are modified based on the template applied. In this exercise. enter an Offset of 1' 0". The Level 2 Plenum floor plan is now listed under MEP . This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. Under View Depth. right-click Level 2 Plenum. you created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view in preparation of placing spaces. right-click Level 2 Plenum.Modify plenum properties 17 In the Project Browser. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. you use space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. In the next exercise. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Floor Plans. you place spaces in areas of the building model. verify that Associated Level (Level 2 Plenum) is specified with an offset of 0. select Plenum Plan. For View Classification. for Top.Plenum. for Level. Under Extents. 48 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. select Design. However. Notice that the site plan displays in the view. Placing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. 18 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. verify that 1/8" = 1'-0" is selected. for View Scale. 20 In the Project Browser.

verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_02_i. ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is cleared. click Training Files. For Offset.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel. indicating that it’s the active view. enter 0. select New. select Level 2 Plenum. This specifies the vertical extent of the space. walls. You can also use the Highlight Boundaries feature to view boundary elements in the model. 2 Zoom to the empty room to the left of the corridor. For (Tag Location). Place a space 1 In the Project Browser. Placing Spaces | 49 .Space Plan is highlighted. For Space.rvt. select Horizontal. Spaces can be created automatically and numbered in sequence by using the Create Automatically tool. For Upper Limit. and select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down. 6 Place the cursor in the room until the space snaps to the room-bounding elements (floor. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. 5 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. and ceilings).

■ 11 Press Esc to clear the selection. 13 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. For Name. for Number. enter Library. ensuring coordination between the files. double-click the section head in the Library to open the section view (Section 26). 50 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . Notice that the space number and name now match the room number and name from the linked architectural file. 14 In the drawing area. 8 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum.7 Click to place the space. 10 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Identity Data. Click OK. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. enter 219. Prepare the plenum view 12 Open Design ➤ MEP . The software automatically zooms the new view to the same location as in the open view. 9 Select the space.

Placing Spaces | 51 . select Level 3. 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. For Offset. 19 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. change the space name to Plenum and the number to 219P. For Upper Limit. Notice that the space is created in the section view at the same time. enter 0. 18 Select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down. 20 Click in the Library to place the space. and then click Modify. 21 Using the method learned previously.15 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. Place a space in the plenum 16 Click in the Level 2 Plenum floor plan to activate it. demonstrating the parametric functionality of the software.

under Energy Analysis.22 In the Instance Properties dialog. Placing a Space in an Open Area In this exercise. 24 Notice that the floor plan has updated with the changes. 52 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . select Plenum and verify that Occupiable is cleared. you place a space in a large corridor area. 23 Click OK. and then split the space using a space separation line. 25 Close the file with or without saving it. This is beneficial to split up large volumes for equipment selection and sizing.

Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. for Upper Limit.Space Plan is highlighted. indicating that it’s the active view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. verify that Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Placing a Space in an Open Area | 53 . Place a space in an open area 1 In the Project Browser. 6 Click above the top stair to place the corridor space. enter 0. 2 Zoom in to the central corridor near the stairs. 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel. and select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_03_i.rvt. and for Offset. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. select Level 3. 5 On the Options Bar. and then press Esc. click Training Files.

open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Schedule. 10 Using the same method. and scroll to the newly placed space. If you had modified the name and number in the schedule view instead. the plan view would have updated with the changes. 13 To specify the start point of the separation line. 8 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 12 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space Separator. 14 Click perpendicular to the opposite curtain wall to end the horizontal separation line. and double-click the title of the plan view to maximize the view. notice the corresponding architectural room name and number. In the schedule. which was numbered 219Q. 11 Close the schedule view. enter Corridor.7 In the Project Browser. click the endpoint of the lower wall in space Instruction 221. double-click the space name. 54 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . as shown. 9 In the floor plan. and press Enter. change the space number to 216A. and notice that the schedule updates with the changes.

place a space in the lower area of the split space. The new space is numbered correctly (216B). Notice the changed boundaries of the corridor space.15 Press Esc twice. 17 Change the name of the space to Corridor. 18 Close the file with or without saving it. Placing a Space in an Open Area | 55 . 16 Using the method learned previously. with an upper limit of Level 3 and an offset of 0.

and place a section in the view as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click in the Cafeteria space to specify the section start point. Shading is a visual indication of where spaces have been placed (shaded) and where they need to be placed (empty).Placing a Multi-Level Space In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. If necessary. click Training Files. 56 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_04_i. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . click (Flip Section) to reorient the section. Click in the Male restroom to specify the section endpoint.Space Plan is highlighted. Add a multi-level space 1 In the Project Browser. and change the upper limit to account for the entire volume of the chase. 2 Zoom to the chase between the male (226) and female (225) restrooms in the north wing. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section. Use the lower drag control to change the section boundary as shown. you place a space in a chase. indicating that it’s the active view. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt.

for Name. 5 Double-click the section head to open the section view. click in the chase area to place the space. You enter a value that is above the level of the roof. Placing a Multi-Level Space | 57 . 6 Enter VG. For Limit Offset. enter 225PC. 13 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Constraints. enter 4'. 7 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. 10 In the plan view. for Upper Limit. select the space. expand Spaces. and then click OK. 8 Enter WT to tile the views. but that the space does not fill the entire chase. select Roof Level. Notice that you can see the space in the section view as well as in the plan view. In the plan view. enter 0. right-click. Under Identity Data. for Upper Limit. 9 Zoom each view as necessary in order to view the chase. For Number. add a space: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. 12 Click in the section view. select Interior and Reference. On the Options Bar. For Offset. enter Chase. ■ ■ 14 Click OK.4 Press Esc. 11 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. and click Element Properties. select Level 3.

19 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. 15 Press Esc. floors. All spaces in the view are tagged. and click OK. Tag spaces 16 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . Because the chase space is limited by a bounding element. and you placed spaces for various types of areas. 58 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . and maximize the view. 20 Close the file with or without saving it. You used space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area that was part of a larger area. you work with zones in order to control the spatial environment and perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. select Space Tag With Volume. the space displays the volume up to the roof only. under Loaded Tags.Space Plan. ceilings. and roofs) define the extent of space volume used in calculations. 17 Type ZF. In the next exercises. 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. You have created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view.Bounding elements (such as walls.

Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 1 In the Project Browser. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_01_i. The different graphics in the System Browser indicate whether a space is occupiable ( unoccupiable ( ). it is automatically added to the Default zone. Zones allow you to control the spatial environment and to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. ) or Viewing Zones in the System Browser | 59 . indicating that it’s the active view. The recommended workflow is to add each space to a zone that you create. Notice that Default is currently the only zone. The System Browser opens and docks to the right of the drawing area. In the left pane of the Open dialog. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . In this exercise. which removes the space from the Default zone. you view and verify zones in the System Browser. You can change the Occupiable parameter for each space. To display space reference lines.Zoning is highlighted. NOTE A space cannot be placed into an area without being added to a zone. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. 4 Double-click Default to display a list of the spaces in the building model. click Training Files.rvt. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Revit MEP immediately adds them to the Default zone. and verify that All Disciplines is selected. click View ➤ Zones. After a space is placed in an area.Viewing Zones in the System Browser After spaces are placed in the building. The browser is a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones to which they have been assigned. click Reference. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. 3 Right-click in the System Browser. under Spaces. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser.

Using the Edit Zone tab. You work with a single zone until you click Finish. and a new zone is created. Assign spaces to a zone 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. and verify the zones in the System Browser. double-click 121 Cafeteria. indicating that the space is occupiable. you assign spaces to zones in the building. Next. Creating Zones on a Single Level In this exercise. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. click Training Files. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . The graphic in the System Browser updates. 7 Close the file with or without saving it. you can add or remove a space from the zone. the Edit Zone tab displays. 3 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. click Reference. The Zone tool is active. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 6 In the Instance Properties dialog. you will use the System Browser to confirm that the spaces are in the new zone. 60 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . you assign spaces to a zone.5 In the System Browser. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_02_i. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone.Zoning is highlighted. select Occupiable. under Energy Analysis. select Computer Lab 222. and Electrical 220 spaces. To display space reference lines. NOTE The Edit Zone tab provides zone tools and information. As you do this. and click OK. Instruction 221. 4 In the drawing area. and click Finish Editing Zone. In the left pane of the Open dialog. The new zone is listed in the System Browser. and modify the zone properties. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. indicating that it’s the active view. under Spaces.

In the System Browser. ■ The new zone displays with color fill and a zone reference line. and then select only Interior Fill and Reference Lines (clear Boundary and Color Fill). The zone reference line indicates that the 3 spaces are in the zone. expand the new zone and notice that the Computer Lab. select HVAC Zones. 5 With the drawing area active. To view the zone in the drawing area. 6 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog: ■ ■ Under Visibility. type VG. Expand HVAC Zones. Click OK. you need to activate the zone visibility. Creating Zones on a Single Level | 61 . Instruction. and Electrical spaces are added to it (and removed from the Default zone).

and verified the zones in both the floor plan views and in the System Browser. click Training Files. 2 Zoom in to Lounge 215 (to the right of the central stairs).West . under Identity Data. you can drag the zone reference line to relocate it and better view the spaces that are in the zone. 3 Open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . under Spaces. You activated zone visibility in the views. for Name. expand 2 . NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. and verify the zone in the System Browser.Zoning.TIP After you finish editing the zone. In the left pane of the Open dialog. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . To display space reference lines. 12 Close the file with or without saving it. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. The new zone name displays in the System Browser. 62 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .West . click Finish Editing Zone. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. indicating that it’s the active view. In this exercise. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_03_i. 9 In the System Browser. 4 Enter WT to tile the 2 windows. Creating Zones on Multiple Levels In this exercise. click Reference. you assigned zones to spaces that were on the same level of the building. 11 Close the System Browser. you assign spaces on multiple levels to a zone in the building. 10 On the Edit Zone tab. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces.rvt. and click OK. enter 2 . on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Rename the zone 7 Select the zone.Area B to confirm that the 3 spaces are in it.Zoning is highlighted.Area B. Create a zone for spaces on multiple levels 1 In the Project Browser. and then click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Zone Properties.

13 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is selected. 6 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone.5 Click in the Level 1 .Zoning view to activate it. 8 In the Level 1 .Zoning view.Zoning view. 15 Press Esc. Creating Zones on Multiple Levels | 63 . 9 With the Add Space tool active. and then select the tag so that you can use the drag control to move it as desired. Verify that the distance is 1/2". 14 Click in the Lounge space to tag the associated zone. Tag a zone 11 Activate the Level 1 . and add the Lounge 215 space to the zone. 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 10 Click Finish Editing Zone. 7 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. select Lounge 120 to add it to the zone. click in the Level 2 . Select Attached End. zoom out.Zoning floor plan.

on the ViewCube. the tag displays “Not Computed” for those values. click Training Files.Zoning view. Because the heating and cooling loads calculations have not been performed. Verify building information 1 In the Project Browser. you verify the building. under Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans. enter Lounge . In this exercise. for Name Value.Zoning to make it the active view. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_01_i. and view graphical representations of the spaces to verify space boundaries and volumes. View a space 3 In the preview pane of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. double-click the zone tag. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you created a zone for spaces on different levels of the building.rvt. and zone information. 17 In the Change Parameter Values dialog. 64 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . The new zone name displays in the System Browser. 19 Close the file with or without saving it. Working with the Analytical Model In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click the corner where the Top. and Left corners converge to orient the model as shown. Rename the zone 16 In the Level 1 .East. 18 Press F9 to display the System Browser. and click OK. double-click Level 1 . 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. space. You can expand the zone in the System Browser to view the spaces in it.The tag only displays in the view where it was placed. Front.

verify that Wireframe is selected. you can verify that the space boundaries are as you defined them. NOTE Wireframe displays the volume of a space measured by the interior boundaries. You can also view a space in relation to the other spaces or architecture in the entire building. you isolate the space. The space displays while all other spaces are hidden. Right-click in the preview pane to access pan and zoom commands. Using the Highlight tool. Click (Highlight). ■ Click to deactivate the Highlight tool. The Isolate tool allows you to verify one or more spaces even if they are usually obstructed by other spaces or by the building architecture. and select 109 Lounge. ■ TIP You can use the ViewCube to spin/reorient the view. click (Isolate). ■ Working with the Analytical Model | 65 . The space for 109 Lounge highlights in red. With 109 Lounge selected. Next. 5 On the Details tab: ■ Expand 1_South_Lounge. The Details tab contains a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones that have been assigned to them.4 On the View Selector (located below the preview pane).

click . You can use the Space Type Settings dialog to adjust settings as necessary. verify that <Building> is selected. you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the space. click . and in the Space Type Settings dialog. Revit MEP provides default settings for space types. These specify the space usage and construction materials for the space. ■ ■ ■ Next. the space information displays for the selected space. and in the Electrical Loads dialog. you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the zone. Verify space information 7 On the Details tab. scroll down in the left pane. verify that <Default> is selected for Occupancy and Heat Gain (per person). This specifies the number of people or the area per person for the space. select 1_South_Lounge. 66 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . For People. select Lounge/Recreation. 8 Verify the space information: ■ For Space Type. and click OK. This specifies the lighting and power loads for the space. 6 Click to deactivate the Isolate tool. click . and in the People dialog. For Electrical Loads. verify that <Default> is selected for Lighting Values and for Power Values. All spaces in the zone display in isolation. select 109 Lounge. Next. For Construction Type.■ On the Details tab. Below the list of spaces and zones. and then click OK. and then click OK.

NOTE Shading displays the inner volume of a space.Verify zone information 9 Select 1_South_Lounge. 13 Deactivate the Isolate tool. This indicates the outdoor air per person.00 °F : 54. heating air temperature. 12 Using the methods learned previously. The inner volume is bounded by interior surfaces of walls. For Heating Information. Next. and zoom to the corner of the building as shown. Below the list of spaces and zones. 10 Verify the zone information: ■ ■ For Service Type. and air changes per hour. and other room-bounding components. This indicates the cooling set point.00 °F : N/A is specified. verify that 70. For Cooling Information. verify that <Building> is selected. roofs.00 °F : 90. the zone information displays for the selected zone. click (Shading). This indicates the heating set point. NOTE By not specifying values for the humidification set point and dehumidification set point. cooling air temperature. you allow the values to be calculated by the loads engine. and humidification set point. you use the Shading view to examine the inner volume of the model for voids. outdoor air per area. floors. Working with the Analytical Model | 67 . and dehumidification set point. highlight and isolate the space for 109 Lounge to view its inner volume. verify that N/A : N/A : N/A is specified. View the shaded model 11 On the View Selector. This is usually preferable to indicating a particular percentage for those parameters. ■ ■ For Outdoor Air Information. verify that 74.00 °F : N/A is specified.

select Level 3. 68 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . click Cancel. select Plenum. Under Energy Analysis. 17 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Upper Limit.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. ■ ■ Add the plenum space to a zone 21 In the drawing area. select the zone that includes all plenum spaces for Level 2 (named 2_Plenum). it doesn’t need to be included in the heating and cooling loads analysis. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data.Notice that there is a void in a second-floor plenum space. Notice that Condition Type updates to Unconditioned. and then click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. select Plenum. Click OK. 16 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. Under Energy Analysis. Because this is an unoccupied space. open MEP . 18 Click in the empty plenum area to place the space. notice that Condition Type is Heated and Cooled. enter 0. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. for Number. For Offset. Add a space to fill a void 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. 15 In the Project Browser. Modify space properties 19 Select the space. For Name. enter 212P.

2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. 24 Click Finish Editing Zone. In this exercise. verify that Manchester. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans. 25 Open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. you specify project settings that affect heating and cooling. Select Automatically adjust the clock for daylight savings changes.rvt. Specify project settings 1 In the Project Browser. For Location. click Training Files. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads In this exercise. is selected. for City. space. and verify that the space has replaced the void. 3 In the Instance Properties dialog. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_02_i. For Postal Code. and you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis. 23 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space.Space Plan. select School or University. under Energy Analysis. NH. On the Place tab. enter 03101. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. for Energy Data. click in the Value field. and zone information. 4 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. click Edit. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 69 . and viewed the spaces in the preview pane to verify space boundaries and volumes. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and then click In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ ■ . The report that is the result of this analysis allows you to determine the heating and cooling demands of the building. In the left pane of the Open dialog. double-click Level 2 .22 Click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Zone panel ➤ Edit Zone. you verified building. and select space Plenum 212P.

For Ground Plane. This is the parameter that determines whether a space is included in a heating load. If. For Latent. and enter 50 sq. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. and click OK. first highlight it using the cursor so that the space crossing lines display. For Space Type. For Export Complexity. NOTE The Areas and Volumes option must be selected in order to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Space Type Settings dialog. enter 150 Btu/h. 6 On the Computations tab of the Area and Volume Computations dialog. ■ In the Type Properties dialog. For Project Phase. select Heated and cooled. verify that Simple with Shading Surfaces is selected. select Library . for Building Service. after opening the Heating and Cooling Loads tool. For People. or neither. verify that Use closest weather station (Manchester Airport) is selected. for Values. verify that <Building> is specified. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify area and volume setting 5 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Area and Volume Computations. 70 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . verify that Level 1 is selected. both. this option adjusts the times automatically. Click OK twice. 7 Zoom in to the center area of the building. click Edit. For Sensible. for Values. For Sliver Space Tolerance. click in the Value column. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Energy Analysis. under Volume Computations. select space Library 219. For Condition Type. and click Element Properties.Audio Visual. Select Area per person. and click OK. In order to select a space. and click OK. enter 200 Btu/h. right-click. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is specified. verify that Occupiable is selected. verify that New Construction is selected. verify that 1' 0" is specified. Under Heat Gain (per Person).When the location is in an area that observes Daylight Savings Time. a cooling load. In the People dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Occupancy. verify that Areas and Volumes is selected (default setting). select Specified. 8 In the drawing area. ft. you need to select this option. For Building Construction. you receive a message that the Areas and Volumes option is not checked and that the space volumes will be approximate. and then click . select Specified. ■ On the Weather tab.

NH. If a (Warning) displays for any space in the building. verify that Heating Set Point is 70°F .■ ■ ■ Click OK. and click OK. and click to learn the cause for the warning. verify that <Building> is specified. (opens the IMPORTANT The Heating and Cooling Loads dialog contains building information that only affects the heating and cooling loads analysis. select 219 Library. click OK to save your changes and close the dialog. The information for the space that you entered in the Element Properties dialog displays. and then re-open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog to begin calculations. 11 On the General tab of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. click Edit. you view the space and zone volumes in the building model. 12 Click the Details tab. Perform a heating and cooling loads analysis 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. verify that School or University is selected. it should be corrected before you calculate loads. For Building Construction. is specified. You should correct the space error in the building model. and can be modified here. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 71 . verify the settings specified earlier: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. ■ Select 2_Middle_Library. Under Power. For Electrical Loads. For Location. Revit MEP stores this information as project information. If you have made changes to settings in the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. 13 Under 2_Middle_Library. for Values. Next. click Calculate. Select the space associated with the warning. There should be no warnings displayed. Click OK twice. verify that Manchester. and under Heating Information. click Information). for Values. select Actual. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is selected. For Building Service. See Help for more information about the integrated heating and cooling loads analysis tool and its calculation methods. In the Electrical Loads dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Lighting. select Actual. Various factors (such as analytical and inner volumes of the spaces) are analyzed as Revit MEP performs the heating and cooling loads analysis. (Zone Heating ■ In the Heating Information dialog. 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. You can view the building materials for this construction type by clicking Building Construction dialog). You have verified the building information.

or zone information. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog. TIP You can find all generated Loads Reports in the Project Browser under Reports. click the blue hyperlink for 219 Library. and a loads report displays. 19 In the drawing area. Creating a Zone Color Scheme In this exercise. click Training Files. under Energy Analysis. select HVAC Zones. For Color Scheme. verify that Cooling Load by Zone is selected. indicating that it’s the active view. 4 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Space Type. In this exercise. you assign a color scheme to a zone in the building. A color scheme allows you to communicate and identify parameters visually and spatially rather than by using space schedules or accessing element properties. weather. Click OK. otherwise the loads report or schedules will not reflect your changes. In the left pane of the Open dialog.After the heating and cooling loads analysis is completed. the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog closes. 2 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. 22 Close the file with or without saving it. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_03_i. under the zone summary for 2_Middle_Library. Assign a color scheme to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. 15 Review the loads report for project. 72 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . you can rezone the model as necessary to optimize equipment usage in the building. 17 In the loads report.rvt. 21 Click OK. space. NOTE You must perform a new heating and cooling loads analysis each time you modify building. 18 Close the report and activate Level 2 . 3 In the drawing area. 16 After you review the loads report.Space Plan. You are taken to the place in the report where the space information is displayed for review. space. and zone information for the building model. Notice that the space information was automatically updated. review the Calculated Loads and Design Loads.Zoning Load Fill is highlighted. click to the right of the building to place the legend. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . you performed a heating and cooling loads analysis on your building and viewed the loads report. and then click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. select 219 Library. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. or make any changes to the model.

in 1-ton increments. Creating a Zone Color Scheme | 73 . and click OK.5 Zoom in to the legend. 8 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. select the color scheme legend. under Schemes. You want a scheme that allows for a greater tonnage range. 7 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. Notice that the cooling load is based on tonnage value. Select a different color scheme legend 6 In the drawing area. The new scheme displays in the view. select Tonnage Range.

74 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .The new scheme allows for a greater range of cooling load values. 9 Type ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. The colors are updated in the plan view to match the new scheme type. add a Cooling Load by Zone color scheme to the HVAC zones of the section view. Apply a color scheme to a section view 10 In the Project Browser. 11 Using the method learned previously. open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26.

you create a schedule that you use as a design tool for the supply air system. you applied a color scheme to the zones in your building. ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify schedule properties 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ At the bottom left of the dialog. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_04_i. select New Construction. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Report and Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. Select Schedule building components. Creating an Airflow Schedule In this exercise. select Spaces. Instead of placing this schedule on sheets as a construction document. verify that Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. you create a schedule for the supply air system project. click Training Files. more category options are available. Click OK. You then use the schedule to adjust the air terminal airflow properties to more closely meet design requirements.Space Fill is the active view. select Spaces.rvt.12 Close the file with or without saving it. Define the schedule 1 In the Project Browser. In the next exercise. For Phase. you use it as a design tool to determine whether the correct amount of airflow is being supplied to each of the rooms in the model. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 75 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. If you select Show categories from all disciplines. enter Space Airflow Schedule. for Select available fields from. In this exercise. For Name.

select Airflow Delta. the calculated value named Airflow Delta displays under Scheduled fields and will display as a column in the schedule. and Blank line. You format the Airflow Delta field to display as red when the difference between calculated and actual airflow is outside an acceptable range. 76 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . ■ ■ Using the method learned previously. In the Calculated Value dialog. and then click Conditional Format. Click OK. select Level. Specify additional schedule properties ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. For Then by. select Calculated Supply Airflow. enter . Select Formula. select HVAC. click (Browse). enter Airflow Delta. select Air Flow. For Fields. select Number. Define conditional formatting for the airflow delta ■ In the Conditional Formatting dialog: ■ For Test. For Formula. and click OK. for Formula. ■ Click Calculated Value. select Not Between.■ Under Available fields. For Discipline. In the Schedule Properties dialog. and then click . select Level. Define the airflow delta formula 5 In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. and then select Hidden field.(minus sign) after Calculated Supply Airflow. ■ On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ For Fields. In the Fields dialog. Select Ascending. add Actual Supply Airflow to the formula. Header. For Type. double-click: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Level Number Name Calculated Supply Airflow Actual Supply Airflow The selected fields are added to the Scheduled fields section.

select red. you begin the designing phase by placing air terminals in the spaces. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 77 . When you select a field and click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Highlight in Model.■ ■ ■ For Value. For Background Color. right-click to access schedule properties. a view opens that contains the selected space. Click OK twice. In the next lesson. and you can manipulate the display of columns as with any spreadsheet. enter -25 CFM and 25 CFM. Double-click the column boundary to expand the column to the width of the text. In the Color dialog. Because no air terminals have been placed in the model. you created an airflow schedule and defined properties such that when the airflow delta is in an unacceptable range. ■ The schedule displays. In this exercise. the schedule gives a visual indication of the discrepancy. Under Conditions to Use. you use the airflow schedule when adding system components to satisfy the required airflow. notice that the software will test for delta values that are outside the range of -25 to 25 CFM. and click OK. all the Actual Supply Airflow values are 0. 7 Close the file with or without saving it. This concludes the planning stage of the systems project. In later exercises. verify that Show is highlighted. or right-click a column to hide or unhide it. click the color swatch. and all Airflow Delta fields are red for occupiable spaces. 6 On the Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Filter Unplaced or Unenclosed Items panel.

78 .

you use automatic layout tools and manual placement to create the primary and secondary supply air systems and ductwork to connect the components that you added. IMPORTANT It is highly recommended that you complete Designing Mechanical Air Systems before starting Designing Piping Systems. you size ductwork and validate your air system design. and work with the airflow schedule.Designing Mechanical Air Systems 5 Designing air systems in Revit MEP is a straightforward and intuitive process. learn a method to precisely place air terminals into the ceiling plan. you will have been introduced to concepts and practices that you will use to design the piping systems. You begin your supply air systems design by placing air terminals in rooms and adding a water source heat pump (WSHP). you place air terminals in the ceiling of the rooms. After system creation. In this lesson. you will create supply air systems. 79 . you modify air terminal parameters. Then. Placing Hosted Air Terminals In this exercise. After completing the air systems lesson. As you place the air terminals.

Design ➤ Ceiling Plans ➤ Level 2 . 80 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_01_i. click Training Files.rvt. the space crossing lines display. 5 Select space 223 in the schedule. 3 In the ceiling view. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and then click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.HVAC Ceiling is highlighted. and scroll to space 223. zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner. indicating that it’s the active view. 4 Click in the schedule view to make it active. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and notice that the space is selected in the plan view as well. Prepare the design views 1 In the Project Browser. When you highlight a space using the cursor. 2 Double-click Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.

11 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. NOTE Hosted air terminals are placed at the height of the host. Copy the supply diffuser 14 With the diffuser still selected. and press Enter. and press Enter. Notice that the lounge’s Actual Supply Airflow field in the schedule updates after the terminal is placed. and then press Esc to end the command. 13 On the Options Bar. for Flow. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 81 . click Place on Face. verify that Constrain is cleared. If the host element is modified or moved.Hosted : 24"x24" Face 8" Neck .HVAC Ceiling to make it the active view. 10 Click to place the supply diffuser in the upper left corner of the space.Rectangular Face Round Neck . click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. and then select both Copy and Multiple. select the diffuser. enter 425 CFM. 8 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Element panel. The schedule updates with the new flow data. Modify the supply diffuser flow 12 In the ceiling plan. as shown. which in this case is the ceiling grid.Hosted from the Type Selector drop-down. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal.Add a supply air terminal 6 Click in Level 2 . Also. 18 Repeat to add a third diffuser. and select Supply Diffuser . 19 Place 2 additional diffusers as shown. the Airflow Delta is calculated accordingly. 17 Move the cursor down. the hosted elements are updated as well. 9 On the Placement panel. 15 On the Options Bar. 16 Select the upper left corner of the diffuser as the copy start point. Multiple allows you to place multiple copies of the diffuser without reactivating the Copy tool after each placement. type 12.

and then press Esc. click Yes. As you place the return diffusers. 29 Place 2 diffusers.rfa. 82 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . Next. notice that the insertion point snaps the center of each diffuser to a grid intersection instead of centering the diffuser between grid lines. 24 In the Open dialog. 21 On the Options Bar. navigate to Training\Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\Diffuser Tag. 27 Select Return Diffuser . If alerted that there is no tag loaded for the diffuser object. select one of the diffusers. Each diffuser has an airflow capacity of 425 CFM. clear Leader. Place return diffusers 26 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. you edit the return diffuser family in order to align the diffuser edges to the ceiling grid lines. 22 In the drawing area. 28 On the Placement tab. and click Open.Hosted : Workplane-based Return Diffuser from the Type Selector drop-down. as shown. you load one from the library as follows: 23 In the alert dialog. click Place on Face. and the airflow delta value is within acceptable range. 25 In the drawing area. select each of the 5 supply diffusers.Tag diffusers 20 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category.

for Reference. 32 In the Project Browser.Edit the diffuser family 30 In the drawing area. select one of the return diffusers. 34 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Instance Properties. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 83 . 31 In the alert dialog. Level. open Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Ref. and click to select the lines. press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. select Strong Reference. click Yes. as shown. 36 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. under Other. 35 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. 33 Highlight one of the symbolic lines. and click OK. You change the symbolic lines to strong references so that they can be used to align to the lines of the ceiling grid.

37 In the Family Already Exists dialog, click Overwrite the existing version and its parameter values. Align the diffusers in the ceiling grid 38 In the ceiling plan, zoom in to the return diffuser at the bottom left of the Lounge. 39 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. 40 In the drawing area, select the vertical grid line as shown.

41 Select the right edge of the diffuser. 42 Select the horizontal grid line as shown, and then select the top edge of the diffuser.

43 Using the same method, align the other return diffuser, as shown, and then press Esc twice.

44 While pressing Ctrl, select both return diffusers, and on the Options Bar, for Flow, enter 650 CFM310 CFM, and press Enter. Modify the airflow display arrows 45 Select the return diffuser at the lower left, right-click, and click Element Properties. 46 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Mechanical, clear LeftArrow, and click OK.

84 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

47 Using the same method, clear RightArrow and DownArrow for the other return diffuser.

48 Close the file with or without saving it.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals
In this exercise, you place air terminals in a room that does not have a dropped ceiling. As you place the air terminals, you modify air terminal parameters and work with the airflow schedule.

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open ➤ Project.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_02_i.rvt.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 85

Add non-hosted air terminals 1 In the Project Browser, expand HVAC - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1 - HVAC Plan - Design to make it the active view. 2 On the View Control Bar, for Scale, click 1/8" = 1'-0". 3 Zoom in to space Instruction 115, at the lower left corner of the building. When you highlight a space using the cursor, the space crossing lines display, and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. 5 Open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule, and then click View tab ➤ Windows ➤ Tile. 6 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. 8 In the Type Selector, select Supply Diffuser - Rectangular Face Round Neck : 24x24 - 8 Neck. 9 On the Options Bar, verify that Tag on Placement is selected. 10 In the drawing area, click to place the air terminal in the space as shown, and then click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.

The schedule was automatically updated with the actual supply airflow capacity of the diffuser. Also, the diffuser was tagged as it was placed. NOTE The software assigns sequential numbers to components in the order in which they are placed in a drawing. If you delete a component and subsequently place more of the same component in the same drawing, the number assigned to the deleted component will not be used. As a result, your components may be numbered differently than those in the training files. 11 Select the diffuser, and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 12 Modify the diffuser properties:

In the Instance Properties dialog, under Constraints, for Offset, enter 8'. Because non-hosted components are associated with a level, the offset value is the height of the diffuser from the level. Under Mechanical - Airflow, for Flow, enter 360 CFM. Click OK.

■ ■

86 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

13 With the diffuser still selected, click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 14 Select the bottom left corner of the diffuser, move the cursor down, type 20', and then press Enter. 15 Press Esc. By copying the diffuser, you are also specifying the same offset and flow for the new diffuser. Notice that the copied air terminal does not have a tag.

16 Using the same method, select both air terminals and copy them 14' to the right.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 87

Tag existing diffusers 17 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 18 On the Options Bar, clear Leader. 19 Select each of the untagged diffusers, and then press Esc. Create an embedded schedule You enhance the schedule by creating an embedded schedule to show data (system type, type, mark, and flow) for individual diffusers in each space. 20 Double-click the title bar of the Space Airflow Schedule to maximize it, and then right-click in the schedule, and click View Properties. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Other, for Embedded Schedule, click Edit. 22 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■

Select Embedded Schedule. For Category, select Air Terminals, and then click Embedded Schedule Properties.

23 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available Fields, double-click System Type, Type, Mark, and Flow. 24 On the Sorting/Grouping tab, for Sort by, select Mark. 25 Click OK 3 times. The schedule is updated and lists the data for individual air terminals in each space. Although the Airflow Delta value is within an acceptable range, it is a negative value. Next, you modify the airflow capacity of the diffuser in the lower left corner of the space to offset the increased heat gain of the southwesterly exposure.

88 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

Modify an airflow value in the schedule You use the schedule as a design tool to modify the airflow. 26 Using the method learned previously, tile the windows. 27 In the schedule, under space 115, select SD 1-12-110. 28 In the embedded portion of the Space Airflow Schedule, for Flow, enter 450 CFM, and press Enter. 29 Using the same method, change the flow for SD 1-12-111 and 112 to 330 CFM. Each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project, because you are modifying the digital database of building information. This digital database information source is the integral concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM).

The Airflow Delta value for the space updates to a positive number.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 89

Place air handling equipment 30 Close the Space Airflow Schedule, and maximize Level 1 - HVAC Plan - Design. 31 In the drawing area, select the zone (2-West-Area T) that includes space 115. As you highlight the zone, pay attention to the tooltip and the status bar to be sure you’re selecting the zone and not the space. The zone indicator has a line that spans all spaces in the zone, as shown.

32 Open the Instance Properties dialog, and under Energy Analysis, verify that the Calculated Heating Load value is 33807 Btu/h and the Calculated Cooling Load value is 3.9 ton (approximately 1.5 times the heating load). 33 Click OK. 34 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 35 In the Type Selector, select WSHP - Horizontal - High Efficiency - 2-5 Tons - Left Return - Right Discharge : 4 Tons. 36 In the drawing area, zoom and pan to the double door for space 115. 37 Press Spacebar twice to change the rotation of the pump so that the supply faces the space and the return faces away from the space. 38 Click to select an insertion point so that the supply is at the approximate center of the doorway. 39 Press Esc twice to end the command.

90 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

41 In the Instance Properties dialog.40 Access the instance properties for the heat pump. 42 Press Esc to clear the selection. and verify the height of the WSHP: ■ ■ Click Modify tab ➤ Inquiry panel ➤ Measure drop-down ➤ Measure Between Two References. For the start point. for Constraints ➤ Offset. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 91 . 44 Zoom in to space 115. and click OK. click to select the midpoint of the bottom of the WSHP. Verify that the measured distance is 9'. click the Level 1 line. enter 9' 0"2750. Verify equipment mounting heights 43 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26. ■ ■ For the end point.

2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 at the upper left of the building. Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser. A Revit MEP system is the logical connection between system components such as air terminals and mechanical equipment. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. You create air systems by placing air terminals and mechanical equipment. indicating that it’s the active view. you also use the System Browser to validate systems. 5 Verify that there are no Mechanical systems listed. IMPORTANT Unlike logical connections. right-click the title. you create low pressure secondary supply air systems. When you highlight a space. and click View ➤ Systems. verify that Design ➤ HVAC . and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_03_i. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. 45 Close the file with or without saving it.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . click Training Files. you then create ductwork to physically connect the system components. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. However.rvt.HVAC Plan . they are necessary to perform calculations (such as sizing) that reference the physical geometry. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 If the System Browser title is Zones.Press Esc. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser.Design is highlighted. physical connections (ductwork) are not required for systems designing. including energy analysis. In this exercise. the space crossing lines display. After creating the logical connection. 92 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . You then create the logical connection between the system components.

the assigned diffusers move to the respective system folder. and Flow value. 10 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. System Name. Notice that there are layout and system tools (Generate Layout. expand Mechanical ➤ Supply Air ➤ Mechanical Supply Air 1. Note that the Flow value (1700 CFM) is equal to the sum of the flow values for the 4 diffusers you added to the system. select the 3 supply diffusers shown in red and circled. the number of elements is updated. These tools vary depending on the equipment used to create a system. Notice that a mechanical system now displays in the System Browser. Only mechanical equipment components can be highlighted and selected when you are using the Add To System tool. 15 Click Cancel. 9 Click Modify Duct Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 93 . 16 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. 8 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Supply. select the supply diffuser at the upper left of space 223. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy. and Create Systems) available on the Modify Air Terminals tab. Revit MEP assigned them to the Default Supply Air system. On the Options Bar. Because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed. 11 In the drawing area. Create a secondary air system 7 In the drawing area. 12 In the System Browser. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. 13 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. Connect Into. All of the diffusers (air terminals) that you added are located under default systems categories in the Unassigned folder. As you add diffusers to systems.IMPORTANT In the System Browser. and drag it to the bottom of the screen so that it displays horizontally below the floor plan. 6 Keep the System Browser open. review the Number of Elements. and then select the last supply diffuser in space 223.

you also use the System Browser to validate systems. Rename the system Next.17 Using the method learned previously. you created low pressure secondary supply air systems for the building. highlight the value (WSHP 2-45) and click Ctrl+C to copy it. access system properties to see that the flow value (2125 CFM) has updated to include the flow value of the final supply diffuser. 26 Click Finish Editing System. and the system connects them. In this exercise. and then select the WSHP (located outside the space). highlight the value and click Ctrl+V to paste over the selection. 23 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. NOTE The organization of the Mechanical folder in the System Browser has changed so that the WSHP is the parent. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. you create ductwork to physically connect system components. In this exercise. You used the Create Supply Systems tool to logically connect air terminals to the WSHP. 25 Click OK. 94 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . you rename the system to match the identifying data (Mark) of the equipment properties. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. for Mark. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. under Identity Data. 27 Close the file with or without saving it. the air terminals are the children. 22 Click OK. 20 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Equipment Properties. for System Name. The system name is updated from Mechanical Supply Air 1 to WSHP 2-45 in the System Browser. 18 Click OK. 19 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Select Equipment. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. which updates the name in the System Browser. under Mechanical.

and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 95 . 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner. 5 On the Options Bar.Design is highlighted. click Training Files.rvt. which provides various layout tools.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Add ductwork using the Generate Layout tool 1 In the Project Browser. Lines indicate the proposed duct layout (blue signifies a main duct line and green signifies a branch). select the upper left diffuser. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. the software recognizes the system components and sketches a temporary layout path connecting them. indicating that it’s the active view. Also. the Network type provides several solutions. When you highlight a space using the cursor. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_04_i. In this case. 4 In the drawing area. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . for Solution Type. 3 If the System Browser isn’t displayed. and display solution 1. A Generate Layout tab displays. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser to display it. the space crossing lines display. select Network. 6 Use the Next Solution and Previous Solution arrows to scroll through the available solutions.HVAC Plan. each with branches off the main duct at 90-degree angles.

9 On the Generate Layout panel. enter 3'. and use the drag control to drag it just to the left of the lighting fixtures. For Duct Type. select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees. click Settings.Round. If there is not enough room for the software to create the necessary fittings. select Flex Duct Round : Flex . For Offset. WARNING Be careful not to drag the main duct too close to the diffusers. enter 9' 10 1/2". Click OK. enter 9' 10 1/2". 10 Select a vertical segment of the main duct. 96 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . For Offset. For Maximum Flex Duct Length.7 On the Options Bar. select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees. click Modify. 8 In the Duct Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Main. you’ll get an error in a later step. For Flex Duct Type. Select Branch. For Duct Type. as shown.

The sketch lines are converted to ductwork. For example. The most common cause of these errors is that the duct usually has insufficient space to be created. as is the elbow itself. All fittings required to connect the duct system to system components are automatically added. NOTE Errors may occur while attempting to create duct geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. select a different layout solution.11 Click Finish Layout. Either relocate the system components. or offset elevations are incorrect. Remember to always check duct connectivity after modification. a transition connecting the elbow is automatically added. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 97 . or manually modify the duct.

NOTE When multiple ducts and fittings are connected. thus it is not part of the system. and click to select it. Typically the disconnect results from not having enough room between the components that make the connection. under Graphics. and click OK. 15 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. This disconnection will be located at the point where the highlighting stops. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Duct Legend. You can delete ductwork and the system remains. Notice that the legend includes all possible values for the color scheme. for Color Scheme. and click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. The first time you press Tab.NOTE Notice that the ductwork is not listed in the System Browser. If the entire network does not highlight.Flow. and then click OK. the branch to which the duct is connected highlights. 14 Click to the right of the system to place the legend. 17 In the Type Properties dialog. and equipment. 98 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . Press Tab a second time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts up to the first piece of connected equipment. select Duct Color Fill . you can repair the connection by dragging the duct segment end point away from its current connection point and then dragging it back again to reconnect. The ductwork is a physical (not a logical) connection. select By View. Add a color scheme legend 12 In the drawing area. Modify the legend display 16 Select the color scheme legend. you can verify connectivity as you create a system. Usually. for Values Displayed. fittings. you check connectivity by moving the cursor over a segment of ductwork so that it highlights and then pressing Tab. but not all values are used in this view. Press Tab a third time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts. press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. a disconnection exists. highlight a segment of the main duct. Using a flow-based color scheme.

22 Close the Instance Properties dialog. select the WSHP. for Flow. and then press Esc to clear the selection.The legend now shows only the color scheme values used in this view. Edit color scheme 23 In the drawing area. 24 Click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme.Airflow. The outflow for the WSHP is calculated as the sum of the airflows for all downstream air terminals. 25 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. decrease the flow value by 100 CFM. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 99 . select Duct Color Fill . 20 In the drawing area. 21 Access the instance properties for the WSHP. Modify flow values 18 In the drawing area. for Schemes. and notice that the flow value has updated with the change. and press Enter. Notice that the color fill for the connected ductwork has updated. Use the velocity-based color scheme as a visual reference to confirm that air is flowing through the system ductwork at the appropriate velocity. and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 26 Click OK. under Mechanical . and click OK. note the Air Flow value (2125 CFM). 19 In the Instance Properties dialog.Velocity. and on the Options Bar. select the color scheme legend. select one of the diffusers in the system.

and enter . Select the upper segment of main duct. Select Only. Select Restrict Height. Click OK. The ductwork and fittings are updated.08 in-wg/100ft. If you get an error that there is not enough room to place the required fittings.Calculate duct sizes 27 In the drawing area. select Friction. select Calculated Size Only. The flow information graphically represents the properties of duct systems so that you can easily identify problems with the system. and then click to select it. 100 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . you need to modify the layout: ■ ■ ■ In the warning dialog. Under Constraints. for Branch Sizing. click Cancel. highlight a segment of the duct. Repeat the steps necessary to select the entire system and then size it. and select 16". press Tab 3 times to highlight the entire system (including the WSHP). 29 In the Duct Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method. 28 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. and drag it to the right.

33 Move the cursor over the system components. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 101 . Ductwork and system components must be connected to a system (logical connection). Using this tool. Notice that the ribbon now displays a System Inspector tab.Inspect the system The System Inspector is a tool that lets you place the cursor over each system to inspect it for airflow. and pressure loss. and pressure loss) to find deficiencies in the system. Use the information that displays (flow. and a system must contain ductwork (physical connection). you can target problem areas directly in your design and resolve them. 30 Select one of the ducts in the supply air system. 32 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect. 31 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. The selected system components or duct must be logically and physically connected for you to use the System Inspector to inspect airflow and pressure inside ductwork. pressure. static pressure. so that you can modify the system design accordingly.

also known as the critical path. You also convert rigid duct into specified lengths of flex duct. remember that all information is color-coded according to pressure.rvt. 34 Zoom in to various parts of the system and verify that the flow arrows are correct. Manually Creating Ductwork In this exercise. 35 Click Finish. 102 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_05_i. 36 Close the file with or without saving it. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Red information and arrows indicate the highest percentage of pressure loss due to friction.NOTE As you inspect a system. click Training Files. you modify existing ductwork and then use the Connect Into tool to connect components to the existing air system.

Manually create main duct line 1 In the Project Browser. and select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows / Beveled Taps from the Type Selector drop-down.HVAC Plan . 4 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Element panel. 5 Press Spacebar to make the new duct match the WSHP duct size and location. and select the WSHP.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . and click Draw Duct.Design is highlighted. and click to specify the end of the main duct. 3 Right-click the supply air connector (the connector facing the room’s double doors). 6 Click midway between the 2 top light fixtures to specify the end of the first segment of the main duct. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 2 Zoom in to space Instruction 115 in the lower left corner. Manually Creating Ductwork | 103 . 7 Move the cursor to just below the lowest set of diffusers. indicating that it’s the active view.

and click Draw Duct. double-click MEP . use the connector grip to quickly and accurately locate a connector. 12 End the branch by clicking at the intersection of the branch duct and the main duct. NOTE When drawing duct. Front. 13 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.3D MEP. select 9' 10 1/2". 10 Select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows/Taps from the Type Selector drop-down. Click this corner Resulting view orientation 104 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . Create branch duct lines 9 To begin branch duct. The software accounts for the difference in height from the diffuser connector to the specified offset height. for Offset. 15 On the ViewCube. and Left sides converge in order to orient the view as shown. click the corner where the Top.8 Press Esc twice to end the command. Connect the remaining diffusers using the Connect Into tool The Connect Into tool is used to add or connect components to an existing air system. 11 On the Options Bar. 14 In the Project Browser. select the top right diffuser.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ Level 1 . right-click the connector grip.

19 In the drawing area. The ductwork is automatically created.16 Zoom in to space Instruction 115. Because this branch has 2 end points (the diffuser and the connector into the main duct). the color fill indicates the flow value. 20 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 21 Click the main supply duct to select it as the duct to connect into. Manually Creating Ductwork | 105 . 17 Tile the windows so that you can view results in 3D as you add duct in 2D. select the top unconnected supply diffuser. 18 Make the floor plan the active view. Also. 22 Using the same method. connect the remaining diffusers to the main duct. in space 115. and is sized appropriately for the neck size of the diffuser. it is considered a closed loop.

106 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . You can ignore the warning. A portion of the rigid ductwork is converted to Flex Duct. and select the top left diffuser. Revit MEP displays a warning that the flex duct that was created exceeds the Maximum Flex Duct setting in the Mechanical Settings dialog. zoom in to the open end of the main duct. 24 Select the remaining diffusers.Branch ductwork in 2D Convert duct to flex duct 23 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Convert to Flex Duct. 25 Press Esc. Branch ductwork in 3D Add an endcap 26 In the plan view.

you need to add an endcap to create a closed loop.To ensure that the system has proper flow propagation and accurate system calculations. Manually Creating Ductwork | 107 . and click to select it. 32 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Split. 28 Select Rectangular Endcap : Standard from the Type Selector drop-down. 29 Click the endpoint snap of the main duct. Size ductwork 34 Highlight a section of the main duct (which is now split). and then click Modify. press Tab to highlight the entire main duct run. Endcap in 3D Split and size main duct 31 Maximize the plan view. 27 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Duct Fitting. 30 Press Esc twice. 33 Click on the main duct below the top set of diffusers as shown.

select a segment of the main duct. such as a plenum. The ductwork is sized to provide appropriate CFM value for the system. 108 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .Airflow. and click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. and click OK. for Flow. This height constraint is used when you place duct in a restricted space. under Mechanical . verify that the value is the total of the diffusers supplied by that segment of duct. 36 In the Duct Sizing dialog. clear Restrict Height. 40 Using the same method. and then click OK. under Constraints. 37 Press Esc to clear the selection.35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. Verify duct sizing 38 In the drawing area. verify the flow rate for the remaining segments of the main duct. 39 In the Instance Properties dialog.

you create a hydronic piping system that is designed to run in a cooling mode and a heating mode. Create return and supply piping systems. Use a color-coded display to verify and adjust pipe sizing. Add valves to allow the overall piping system to work in 2 modes: cooling and heating. you learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment. or to bypass the cooling tower during heating mode. you create the systems and piping to logically and physically connect the system components. This system is modeled to accommodate full system flow through a boiler. including 2 base mounted pumps. In this lesson. Inspect and validate the piping systems and physical connections. Then. using modulating valves to divert through the cooling tower during cooling mode. additional water source heat pumps from level 1. You begin the piping system design by placing water source heat pumps and a boiler on level 3 of the building model. Automatically and manually lay out piping. and a cooling tower located on the roof.Designing a Mechanical Piping System 6 In this lesson. 109 . Use the System Browser to review the piping systems.

click Training Files.rvt. including 2 water source heat pumps (WSHP) and a condensing boiler. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_01_i. you place mechanical equipment. on level 3 of the building model.Level 3 mechanical piping system Adding Mechanical Equipment In this exercise. 110 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .

7 On the Options Bar.Left Return .HVAC Plan . in corridor 328. A tooltip and the status bar (located at the lower left of the window) confirm the space name and number. Adding Mechanical Equipment | 111 . and click to place it in the shorter wing of the building.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 .High Efficiency . 2 Zoom in to the right side of the shorter building wing. verify that Wall faces is selected. you can identify a space by placing the cursor over the space component. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment.Design is highlighted.Horizontal . indicating that it’s the active view. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .Adding air side equipment 1 In the Project Browser. 4 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. and select WSHP .2-6 Tons . 5 Press Spacebar to rotate the component. as shown.Right Discharge : 6 Ton from the Type Selector drop-down. NOTE Although space tags are not included in this view. 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned.

(Use the alignment sketch graphics to position the second WSHP the same distance from the corridor wall as the first. 10 Select the WSHP. click the dimension. as shown. as shown. 11 Press Enter and then press Esc. and in the Type Selector. and enter 2'. and click to place the dimension. 12 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. verify that the WSHP is still selected.8 Click the corridor wall face. click the top edge of the WSHP. 13 Place another WSHP to the left of the one you just placed.) 112 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 9 Click Place Dimensions tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.

for Water Flow. and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. above and to the left of the Base Mounted Pump. and select Condensing Boiler : 500 MBH from the Type Selector drop-down. enter 12 GPM. Add water side equipment 18 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. enter 9'. 20 Press Spacebar 3 times to rotate the component. 19 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. 17 Press Esc to clear the selection. and click to place it in the mechanical room.14 Click Modify. select the 2 WSHPs. Click OK. for Offset. Under Mechanical. Modify WSHP parameters 15 While pressing Ctrl. Adding Mechanical Equipment | 113 . as shown.

A system is the logical connection between system components such as water source heat pumps (WSHPs) and a boiler. 114 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses. Creating a Piping System In this exercise. 22 Close the file with or without saving it. The recommended workflow to create piping systems is to: ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment and other system components. you create the return and supply piping systems. Create the logical connection between the system components. and use the System Browser to review and confirm the systems.21 Click Modify. including flow and pressure. Create pipes to physically connect the system components.

IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . physical connections (pipes) are not required for systems creation. This display option allows you to simplify the browser view by showing only the Piping discipline. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_02_i. Unlike logical connections (systems).HVAC Plan .Design is highlighted.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. You can create pipes to connect system components. Creating a Piping System | 115 . indicating that it’s the active view. and click View ➤ Piping. click Training Files. analyses cannot be performed. 6 Expand the Unassigned folder. right-click the Systems column heading. but without a corresponding system. 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space .Mech 330). Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser. and expand the Default Hydronic Supply 1 and the Default Hydronic Return 1 systems to view the mechanical equipment placed in the building. 5 In the System Browser. 4 Click the titlebar for the System Browser window. where it is easier to review the information. and drag the window down so it displays along the bottom of the screen. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Chilled water supply system: 2 WSHPs and a cooling tower Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.

Equipment that remains in a default system is included in heating and cooling loads calculations. Assigning a system component to an existing system. This display indicates that the system is selected. 116 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . for System Name. select the 2 WSHPs. Create the hydronic return piping system 7 In the drawing area. select the boiler. 9 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System.In the System Browser. Notice that on the Options Bar. As you assign equipment to systems. 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Return. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. while pressing Ctrl. 11 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. and the Edit System tool is not active. leaving a large number of components in a default system can hinder performance and prevent accurate calculations for the systems where they should have been assigned. Therefore. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy according to the system that you assigned to them. They remain in the Default systems category until you assign them to a system. enter CHWR to represent Chilled Water Return. You assign a system component to a system either by: ■ ■ Creating a logical connection (system) between the system components. select one of the WSHPs that you added to the system to activate this tool and the other options on the Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. the System Equipment is Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. Revit MEP immediately assigned them to the Default Hydronic Return and Default Hydronic Supply systems category located in the Unassigned folder. TIP If you clicked outside of the drawing area. After you placed the WSHPs and boiler. A red dashed line connects the 2 WSHPs in the drawing. IMPORTANT All mechanical equipment in the project should be assigned to a system other than a default system. 12 In the drawing area. 10 On the Options Bar. the assigned equipment moves from the Unassigned folder to the respective assigned system folder.

under Design ➤ HVAC .13 Click Finish Editing System. and select the second WSHP to add it to the supply system. enter CHWS to represent Chilled Water Supply. Notice that the Hydronic Return option does not display because the selected component already has a hydronic return system assigned to it. You have created the hydronic return system. 18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. Create the hydronic supply piping system 14 Select one of the WSHPs that you placed previously. 19 In the Project Browser. 17 On the Options Bar.Design. 21 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building. Creating a Piping System | 117 . (You can click the Piping Systems tab to access the Return System properties. 15 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Supply. and select the cooling tower.Design ➤ Floor Plans. double-click Roof . for System Name.) 16 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 20 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System.HVAC Plan .

28 Using the same method. and click Select. You can now view the systems hierarchy: CHWR and CHWS logically connect the boiler (parent) with the WSHPs (children). and bypasses the cooling tower. the boiler supplies heated water to the system. right-click the Hydronic Supply system category. Notice that the Options Bar indicates 3 for the Number of Elements. expand the Hydronic Return system category. The boiler is the only equipment that has connectors with compatible system types (hydronic supply and hydronic return). 24 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. 23 Close the roof plan view. You select the boiler as equipment for supply to the WSHPs. The CHWS system contains the 2 WSHPs and the cooling tower.22 In the Select Connector dialog. IMPORTANT The new system named CHWS is now listed in the System Browser under Hydronic Supply ➤ Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. 25 Select the boiler. the cooling tower provides cooled water to the system. 26 Click Finish Editing System. In cooling mode. The hydronic supply system highlights in red. 118 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and click OK. 29 Right-click CHWS. In heating mode. and click Expand All. select Connector 1 : Undefined : Round : 4'' : Cooling Water Supply In. indicating the logical connection. Confirm and validate the systems 27 In the System Browser. the water returns through the boiler into the cooling tower by way of the WSHPs.

31 In the Column Settings dialog. including the flow rate and size of the component. expand Piping.In the System Browser. enter 18 GPM. 30 Right-click the Systems column heading. you can view several parameters. under Mechanical. and click OK. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 119 . 34 Close the file with or without saving it. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout In this exercise. right-click the Flow value for one of the WSHPs in the CHWS system. 32 In the System Browser. and click Properties. and click OK. and click Column Settings. for Water Flow. The CHWS Flow value is updated in the System Browser. You can select the columns that you want to display in the System Browser. select Fluid Type and Fluid Temperature. 33 In the Instance Properties dialog. you create the physical connections in the pipe system automatically using the Generate Layout tool. You also manually modify the layout path as required.

8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. click Check None.HVAC Plan . drag the cursor to the lower right corner to draw a selection box around the floor plan.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . you are selecting all components within the view range of the active view. 3 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space . 6 Press Esc to clear the selection. When you draw a box to select components. 10 Click OK. and then click OK to create a layout for the currently selected system. Revit MEP provides several solutions from which to choose.Design is highlighted. Select components with the Filter tool 1 In the Project Browser. You select a system in the dialog to view it in the drawing. indicating that it’s the active view. select Mechanical Equipment.HVAC plan view range are highlighted. 5 In the Filter dialog. and the 2 base mounted pumps are selected (and display in red). then the Select a System dialog displays. The level 3 water source heat pumps (WSHPs). and click to select it. press Tab to highlight the system. 4 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. Create the Level 3 return pipe layout 7 Select a WSHP. the boiler. IMPORTANT If you select system components to create a pipe layout. You use an alternate method of selecting the system in the next steps. 2 Beginning outside the building at the upper left corner. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_03_i. and the selected system components are already connected to more than one system (because they have multiple system connectors). The layout path solutions display with the main in blue and the branch in green. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . A system preview displays in red. 120 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .Mech 330).rvt. click Training Files. TIP Instead of selecting all components and filtering. 9 In the Select a System dialog. you can place the cursor over a system component. Notice that all components within the Level 3 . and click OK. select CHWR.

This functionality is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. Click (Next Solution) until solution 4 of 5 is selected. 14 On the Generate Layout tab. you can change the pipe type and the vertical offset at which the piping will automatically be created. The perimeter solution creates a layout that runs parallel (along a perimeter) to the connectors of the selected system components. You can modify this value for the main and branch elevations. enter 1' 6''. 13 Click Cancel. In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. or architectural components. ■ ■ Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 121 . For Inset. verify that the Offset value for the Main and for the Branch is 10' 0''. structural beams. duct. It does not reference the architecture. verify that Solutions is selected. select Perimeter. 15 On the Options Bar: ■ For Solution Type. 12 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. click Settings. IMPORTANT The branch offset lets you automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles.11 On the Options Bar.

and the flow for the other is 12. Branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment. select the pipe connecting the WSHP on the right to the boiler.16 Click Finish Layout. you modified the flow value for the WSHPs. 19 In the drawing area. the Status Bar displays the components being highlighted: ■ ■ ■ Branch in a pipe network. 122 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 18 Place the cursor over the piping. The piping is automatically created along with the appropriate connectors and fittings so that all of the piping segments are connected to equipment. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. With each Tab. Verify the flow In a previous exercise. to display the path with thinner lines. 17 Optionally. the flow for one WSHP is 18. View the Status Bar to verify the branch option currently displayed. and press Tab 3 times. Branch in a pipe network including the branch objects.

notice that the Water Flow is 30 GPM. and click OK. The flow from the 2 WSHPs travels into the boiler. 22 Select the boiler. Add the Level 1 WSHPs to the return system 25 Select the WSHP on the left. 20 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. under Mechanical. 23 Under Mechanical.The flow through this pipe should equal the flow of both WSHPs. verify that the value for Flow is 30 GPM. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. 24 Press Esc. and access its instance properties. and click OK. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 123 . This value indicates the total of the flow for the 2 WSHPs (18 GPM + 12 GPM).

28 In the Project Browser. and verify that CHWR is selected from the System Selector drop-down. Next. the Level 1 WSHPs are connected to the chilled water return system (CHWR). you physically close the CHWR loop.26 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. 31 Close the Level 1 plan view. 29 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. which propagates flow throughout the system. 32 Click Finish Editing System. On the Options Bar. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Logically. click Edit System. 33 Zoom in to the piping that comes from the floor below. you logically added Level 1 WSHPs to the CHWR System.Design.HVAC Plan . 124 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 27 On the System Tools panel. double-click Level 1 . and zoom to fit the drawing in the view. the Number of Elements is now 8. Physically connect the multi-level WSHPs Previously. 30 Draw a selection window to select the 6 WSHPs.Design ➤ Floor Plans.

and then close the Instance Properties dialog. The Level 3 WSHPs generate a flow of 30 GPM. Manually modify piping in layout mode 39 In the drawing area. note that the value for Flow is 95 GPM. as shown. 38 Using the same method. The fittings are automatically created to connect to the return piping coming from below. and click Cancel. so the total flow of 125 GPM indicates that the flow has propagated correctly. access its instance properties. 35 Using the drag control. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 125 . under Mechanical. and the flow coming from Level 1 is 95 GPM. Verify the flow from the lower level 36 With the new pipe selected. the 6 WSHPs from Level 1 have already been added to the chilled water supply system (CHWS). and then click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. NOTE For the purposes of this tutorial. extend the pipe to the left until it connects to the center line of the existing pipe at the horizontal and nearest snap. 37 In the Instance Properties dialog. select a WSHP. review the properties for the boiler to verify that the Water Flow value is 125 GPM.34 Select the bottom piece of horizontal pipe.

42 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Solution Type. enter 1' 6''. 126 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . select CHWS. enter 9' 6'' for both the Main Offset and the Branch Offset. and then click OK. For Inset. 45 Click the supply pipe from the cooling tower above. In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. ■ ■ 43 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Remove. 41 Click OK. enter 0''/12''. 44 Click the boiler to remove it from the layout path solution. For Slope. Click Settings. select Perimeter 1 of 5. The inset is the distance from the pipe to the connection on the selected system component.40 In the Select a System dialog.

you connect the boiler to parallel-connected base mounted pumps. In a later exercise. 48 While pressing Ctrl. as shown.) 49 Select the 4-way arrow control.The boiler and cooling tower are no longer included in the layout path. 47 In the drawing area. 46 Click Modify. select the right vertical green sketch line in the path. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 127 . select the vertical sketch line just above the one you already selected. (Both sections are at the same elevation. and drag it to the left (just to the right of the double door in the underlay). as shown.

52 Close the file with or without saving it. or offset elevations are incorrect. Add piping to close the supply loop. or manually modify the pipe. and drag it to the right to align it with the sketch lines you just moved. you: ■ ■ ■ ■ Connect the boiler to the return piping.50 Using the same method. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout In this exercise. 51 Click Finish Layout. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. Connect the cooling tower into the supply system to maintain the closed loop. 128 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . you manually lay out piping to create a closed loop system. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. NOTE Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. select a different layout solution. Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel to the system. Either relocate the system components. You tile a plan view and a 3D view to simultaneously create the pipe (physical) connections and validate the pipe geometry. To create the piping system. select the short vertical path line connecting the right WSHP (in the same location as the short segment of pipe).

In the left pane of the Open dialog. Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser. As you work in the training file.HVAC Plan .Design is highlighted. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . indicating that it’s the active view. as shown. 2 Under Design ➤ HVAC . Sometimes (such as during vertical alignment) it’s easier to select components in 3D. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. you will notice that the supply pipes are dark purple. and the return pipes are magenta.NOTE Default color filters for the Hydronic Supply and Hydronic Return have already been specified for this project in the Visibility Graphic Overrides dialog. You may find it helpful to view the system in both plan and 3D during design and validation. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_04_i.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.rvt. 4 Adjust the view in both windows (use the ViewCube and Zoom tools) to see the connections on the boiler. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 129 . double-click 3D HVAC Building.Design ➤ 3D Views. click Training Files.

select the section of piping. as shown. 130 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .Modify return piping to accommodate supply piping 5 In the 3D view. draw a selection window around the elbow fitting and the small piece of pipe connecting into the boiler return connector. 7 In the plan view. 6 Press Delete.

■ Move the cursor up 4''. ■ Click to move the piping. select the boiler. and press Esc to clear the selection. 9 In the 3D view. Click to specify the reference point. 10 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into.8 Move the piping: ■ ■ Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 131 .

select the boiler. and the lower one is secondary. Plan view of return piping connection to the boiler Connect the primary base mounted pump to the boiler Two base mounted pumps are included in the system. and click Draw Pipe.You use this tool on components with connectors to automatically create piping between the component and the existing system. and click OK. select the return pipe riser. The connections are automatically created. 12 In the 3D view. The tool also automatically creates the appropriate fittings. 14 Right-click the grip that represents the supply connector (top). 11 In the Select Connector dialog. 13 In the plan view. The top base mounted pump in the plan view is primary. Using the Connect Into tool ensures that if the connection is successful. flow will propagate through the connecting pipe and be assigned to the appropriate system based on the connector to which it is connected. 132 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . An automatic flow valve will be used to direct the flow from the boiler to the 2 pumps. and the boiler is connected to the return piping. click Connector 2 : Hydronic Return : Round : 2'' : Cold Water In.

Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 133 . if a component has 2 connectors that are not connected to piping. enter 2'. 15 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel.7''. ■ ■ On the Options Bar. 17 Draw the piping: ■ Move the cursor to the right. for Offset.In a plan view. and you select 1 connector. Add another 2' section of pipe to the right. ■ Move the cursor down. 16 Press Spacebar to acquire offset and pipe diameter values from the connector. enter 1' . You can input dimensions as you draw pipe to ensure specific length segments. and select Pipe Types: Standard from the Type Selector drop-down. and press Enter. and click just before the midway point on the primary base mounted pump. the Select Connector dialog displays prompting you to select the return or the supply connector.

22 Select the last segment of pipe you drew. 134 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . as shown. select Connector 2 : Undefined: Round: 3''. Upgrade a fitting 23 Zoom in to the elbow fitting. As you place piping runs that are close together.NOTE The Automatically Connect option attempts to connect piping that is positioned within a specified range. 19 In the plan view. and select it. and click OK. 20 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. select the primary base mounted pump. it may be helpful to switch Automatically Connect off to avoid unintended piping connections. The pipe is automatically connected to the base mounted pump. Notice in the 3D view that the specified offset dropped the horizontal run down. and the appropriate fittings are created. 21 In the Select Connector dialog. 18 Press Esc twice.

NOTE To downgrade from a tee fitting to an elbow. 29 If necessary. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 135 . zoom out in the 3D view to see the new connections. and click to draw the pipe. and when the connector point displays. 28 Press Esc. 26 Move the cursor down until the Status Bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection of the base mounted pump.24 Click the bottom plus symbol to upgrade the fitting from an elbow to a tee. and click Draw Pipe. and click the minus symbol. Connect the secondary base mounted pump 25 Select the tee fitting. right-click the bottom connector. click to connect to the pump. you select the tee fitting. 27 Move the cursor to the right.

and click to create the pipe. right-click the discharge connector. 31 On the Options Bar. 33 Press Esc. 32 Move the cursor down until it joins the connector point on the secondary base mounted pump. for Offset. select the primary base mounted pump.Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel 30 In the plan view. and click Draw Pipe. enter 4'. 136 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .

zoom in to the elbow fitting on the left (secondary) base mounted pump. these pipe connections were created automatically.Notice that you do not have to draw the 2 vertical pipes to connect to the pumps. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 137 . 3D view of parallel-connected base mounted pumps Add pipe to create a closed loop system 34 In the 3D view. upgrade the fitting to a tee connector. 35 Using the method learned previously. as shown.

and click Draw Pipe. ■ ■ On the Options Bar. Move the cursor down until the status bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection and vertical with the pipe shown. and press Enter.36 Draw pipe to connect the base mounted pipes to the return: ■ In the plan view. and click to create the pipe. type 1'. right-click the bottom control on the tee. enter 9' 6''. for Offset. ■ Move the cursor down. 138 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . select the tee connector in the secondary base mounted pump.

37 Click Modify. select the pipe from the secondary base mounted pump to the supply pipe. you validate the flow through the system. right-click. You now have a closed loop system. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 139 . Validate flow propagation through the supply system 38 In the plan view. Next. and click Element Properties.

notice that Flow is 125 GPM. view the properties for the secondary pump. 45 In the Instance Properties dialog. 46 Press Esc. In the Instance Properties dialog. the value is 0 GPM. right-click. 41 Using the same method. Connect the cooling tower Next. notice that under Mechanical. 40 Click Cancel. 43 Press Esc. 140 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 42 Click OK. notice that the Flow Factor is a parameter that is . Flow is not currently passing through the cooling tower because it is not yet connected to the hydronic piping system. ■ Upper pipe going to the cooling tower (inlet). The Flow Factor for the primary pump is set to 50% also. under Mechanical. as shown. select the cooling tower. 44 In the 3D view. The flow is being propagated through the piping. which is rounded up to 63 GPM (1/2 of 125 GPM).39 In the Instance Properties dialog. 48 In the plan view. The cooling tower propagates flow through the inlet and outlet connectors. 47 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Extend drop-down ➤ Trim/Extend Multiple Elements. and click Element Properties. under Mechanical.50 or 50% of the Flow. for Cooling Water Flow. you can specify the Flow Factors for the 2 pumps as any combination that adds up to 100%. select the following pipes: ■ Supply pipe. When you create the pumps in parallel. you physically connect the cooling tower piping to propagate flow. and click OK.

NOTE Piping colors update based on specified filters. 49 Press Esc.■ Lower pipe (outlet). Both pipes for the cooling tower are automatically connected to the piping system. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 141 .

and is heated by the boiler. When the valve is open. 51 Verify that the value for Cooling Water Flow is 125 GPM. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_05_i. You also add shut-off valves to control the flow to and from the cooling tower.rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. you add valves to model the piping for 2 modes: cooling mode and heating mode. and open the Instance Properties dialog to validate that the flow is propagating correctly through the cooling tower. 142 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and close the dialog. You add a bypass valve to stop the flow and direct it to the cooling tower (cooling mode). 52 Close the file with or without saving it. select the cooling tower.50 In the 3D View. Adding Valves In this exercise. the water bypasses the cooling tower. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

Place a bypass valve to control flow to the cooling tower 1 In the Project Browser. indicating that it’s the active view. as shown. NOTE Be careful to select a bypass valve in this step.Design is highlighted. verify that the Diameter value is 3''. 5 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. 6 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Element panel. 4 On the Options Bar. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .HVAC Plan . The bypass valve is closed by default. 3 Click the section of pipe between the supply in and supply out pipes to the cooling tower. 7 Click the center of the pipe to place the valve.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 .2-6 Inch Bypass : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down. Adding Valves | 143 . and select Ball Valve . and click the top Rotate control to rotate the valve to a horizontal position. 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building. 8 Press Esc twice. Rotate the valve 9 Select the valve.

144 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .10 Press Esc. 13 Click to place the valve at the midpoint of the supply pipe to the cooling tower. place another Ball Valve . 12 Select Ball Valve . Place shut-off valves 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory.2-6 Inch : 4'' from the Type Selector drop-down.2-6 Inch Bypass : 4'' valve on the return pipe for the cooling tower. parallel to the previously placed valve. 14 Using the same method. 15 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.

2-6 Inch : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down.) 21 Select the 2 regular valves (in open position). and select Ball Valve . and click OK. Modify valves to bypass the cooling tower Currently the system is designed to run in cooling mode. validate that the Flow is 125 GPM. and click Element Properties. 18 In the Instance Properties dialog.Rotate both valves 16 Click the top Rotate control to the left of each valve to rotate the valve as shown.2-6 Inch Bypass : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down. under Mechanical. validate the following flow values: ■ ■ ■ For the pipe below the bypass valve. 19 Using the same method. verify that Flow is 0 GPM. For the bottom horizontal pipe (flow from the cooling tower). (This valve allows the water to flow through it. and select Ball Valve . right-click. You add valves to the cooling tower to enable the system to alternately run in heating mode. For the top horizontal pipe (flow to the cooling tower). 20 Select the bypass valve. validate that the Flow value is 0 GPM. In heating mode. you want to shut off the flow of water into the cooling tower. validate that the Flow is 125 GPM. You bypass the cooling tower with hot water coming from the boiler. Adding Valves | 145 . Add valves to facilitate a dual mode system 17 Select the small piece of pipe above the bypass valve.

Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. Sizing Pipe In this exercise.22 Using the method you just learned. 146 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_06_i. 3 Click to place the color scheme legend in the area to the right of the piping system. you use the pipe color scheme legend as a color-coded reference to view the flow within the pipes and the sizing. Display the pipe color scheme legend 1 In the Project Browser. indicating that it’s the active view. validate the following: ■ ■ ■ The flow going into the cooling tower is 0 GPM.Design is highlighted. you verify automatically calculated pipe size and flow parameters. click Training Files. The flow coming out of the cooling tower is 0 GPM. The flow traveling through the bypass section of pipe is 125 GPM.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . Initially. The color-coded display allows you to quickly see differing sizes and flow of piping.rvt. 23 Close the file with or without saving it.HVAC Plan . In the left pane of the Open dialog. You then use a combination of friction and velocity to size the pipes appropriately. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Pipe Legend. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . as shown.

and click OK. for Schemes.4 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. click Pipe Color Fill . select Pipe Color Fill .Flow.Size. and click Modify Pipe Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. Sizing Pipe | 147 . This option displays the pipes in colors based on flow values. and click OK. 5 Compare the legend to the color coding in the drawing to verify that the flow values are as expected. 7 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. Display the color fill based on pipe size 6 Select the Color Scheme Legend. 8 Press Esc to clear the selection. This display will help you size the pipe using friction and velocity sizing methods.

10 Move the cursor over the pipe between the primary and secondary base mounted pumps. 12 In the Pipe Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method. press Tab 3 times (so that the status bar indicates that you’ve highlighted a branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment). IMPORTANT The Pipe Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. The piping increases in diameter based on the friction and velocity values specified. enter 5 FPS. It does not report the sizing settings of the selected pipe segment or pipe run. 13 Press Esc.Size the pipe using friction and velocity methods 9 Zoom in to the section of pipe connecting the boiler to the parallel base mounted pumps. 148 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . select Larger of Connector and Calculated. Click OK. and enter 2. Select And. and click to select the branch. for Branch Sizing. and for Velocity. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing.25 FT/100ft. Under Constraints. select Friction.

select a different layout solution. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. Either relocate the system components. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. click Training Files. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. and pressure loss by placing the cursor over a pipe or mechanical equipment that you assigned to the system. Using the System Inspector. or offset elevations are incorrect. The System Inspector lets you inspect each piping system for flow.IMPORTANT Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_07_i. Inspecting the System | 149 .Design ➤ 3D Views. or manually modify the pipe. you use the System Inspector to inspect the Level 3 hydronic piping system. 2 Select the section of the return piping (magenta) between the 2 water source heat pumps on the upper level. Inspecting the System In this exercise. pressure.rvt. Inspect the system 1 In the Project Browser. and double-click 3D HVAC Building. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you can easily detect problem areas in your design and resolve them immediately. 14 Close the file with or without saving it.

150 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . The pipe and the system components must be connected to a system (logical connection) and a system must contain pipe (physical connection). 5 Place the cursor over the same section of return piping. the selected system components and pipe must be logically and physically connected. NOTE Zoom in to the piping to see the arrows clearly. NOTE To use the System Inspector to inspect flow and pressure inside pipe. 4 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect. An inspection flag reports the section number. flow. Arrows display on the pipe indicating the flow direction for both the main and the branches in the pipe system.3 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. as required. and pressure information including pressure loss. The critical flow (indicated by red arrows) is in the main line going to the boiler. This information helps you modify the system design.

10 Click Finish. Checking Piping Systems | 151 . 11 Close the file with or without saving it. as shown.65 psi and the Pressure Loss is 1.67 psi. Checking Piping Systems Revit MEP uses both the pipe geometry and the system to perform calculations such as flow and pressure. select 90° F. In this exercise. Because both the logical (system) and physical (pipe) connections play a vital role in the overall systems design. targeting those systems that need attention. 9 Using the same method. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog.Modify fluid temperature 6 Place the cursor over the section of pipe (Section 6) between the 2 WSHPs on the lower level. and the Pressure Loss is 1. and notice that the Static Pressure is 7. inspect Section 6 again. 7 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Properties.89 psi. Training File ■ Click ➤ Open. for Fluid Temperature. you need to validate them. Note that the Flow is 80 GPM. and click OK. the Static Pressure is 7. and to size pipe. you use the Check Pipe Systems tool to quickly check these connections for all systems throughout your project.88 psi.

Design. Pipe geometry is used for system flow and pressure calculations. and click Show to view all of the system components. 4 In the System Browser.rvt. all system components must be assigned to a system after they are placed. the pipe is associated with that system. 8 Expand Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH.Design ➤ Floor Plans. These warnings can refer to both physical connection issues (such as a disconnected or problematic pipe) or logical connection issues (such as an improperly assigned system). NOTE The check systems warnings contain a system type and a description. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . but the same component has a sanitary system connector that you have not assigned to a system. 5 Verify that Systems and Piping are selected. IMPORTANT The most common check systems warning is: default system is not empty. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_i.Design ➤ Floor Plans. The default system is placed in the Unassigned folder until you select the system components and create a system for them. click Training Files. 7 In the System Browser. Note that a system component may be listed in both its assigned system and in the Unassigned folder.HVAC Plan . 9 Right-click CHWS. 6 In the Project Browser. Pipe that is associated with a default system (located in the Unassigned folder) is not checked. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . A dialog lets you click Show multiple times for different views. You will check the mechanical piping components to learn how to use the System Browser to confirm specified and default system assignments. and click View.HVAC Plan .Design. Notice that these warnings indicate that the Default systems are not empty.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. Use the System Browser to confirm piping system assignments 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. This occurs when the assigned system component can be connected to multiple systems (it contains different system connectors). and double-click Level 3 . notice the CHWS (Chilled Water Supply System) is listed. As you learned when placing components. the water source heat pump is listed in the assigned system and assigned to the Default Hydronic Sanitary system in the Unassigned folder. Perform a systems check 1 In the Project Browser. Revit MEP moves them from the Unassigned folder to their assigned systems folder. the Unassigned folder will be empty and Check Pipe Systems will no longer display not empty warnings. In the System Browser. thus assigning the components to a system. right-click the Systems titlebar. you assigned a water source heat pump to a supply hydronic system. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Pipe Systems. under which the mechanical equipment that was assigned to the system is listed. The dashed red lines represent the logical connection. Note that only physical connections associated with an assigned system are checked. expand the Hydronic Supply folder and notice that the Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH is listed. Revit MEP creates a default system and assigns them to it in order to perform system calculations. Warnings display. For example. double-click Level 1 . Remember that after you create pipe to physically connect a system. After you assign components to a system. and for pipe sizing. 152 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . After you have assigned all components to systems. and you have not yet assigned the component to the other systems. Revit MEP checks both the logical (system) and the physical (pipe) connections of each piping system throughout the project. If you place components without assigning them to a system.

otherwise.HVAC Plan . you can click Show in the Show Element(s) In View dialog to switch between views. 14 Using the methods that you learned. click Close.TIP If you have multiple views open. expand the Unassigned folder. confirm the system and the system assignments for the Hydronic Supply system. You have confirmed and validated both unassigned and assigned system components and their systems. and select Level 3 . and click Select to confirm this system and the assigned system components. right-click Hydronic Return. 11 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Switch Windows drop-down. and confirm unassigned system components. 15 Close the file with or without saving it.Design floor plan. and click Expand All. 13 Right-click CHWR. Checking Piping Systems | 153 . The return system that you created (CHWR) is listed along with the boiler and the water source heat pumps (WSHPs) that you assigned to this system. 10 Using the same methods. 12 In the System Browser.

154 .

Creating an Electrical System In this tutorial. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design an electrical system. 155 .

156 .

Planning an Electrical System 7 In this lesson. Define required lighting. you complete the planning tasks associated with creating an electrical system. Assign space color fills according to required lighting levels. Color fill plan with required lighting levels ■ Create a space lighting analysis schedule 157 . You learn to: ■ ■ ■ Specify electrical settings.

2 In the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. Add a wiring type 3 In the left pane.Wire Sizes. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select Wiring Types. ■ ■ For Factor. For Temperature. select Copper. select Copper. wiring. click (Open). Click OK. click Training Files. In this exercise you review electrical settings. You also add a wiring type.rvt. enter 1. and demand factors that are applied in the design. select 75. speeding up the design phase. 4 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. For Temperature Rating. As you place components and create circuits. expand Wiring . ■ Click New Correction Factor.04. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. distribution systems. Add a correction factor 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. select 90.Specifying Electrical Settings Electrical settings determine the voltages. ■ ■ For Material. and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_01_i. For Material. 158 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . enter THHN. Select Correction Factor. Revit MEP checks to ensure that components are compatible with the specified voltages and distribution systems.

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Insulation, select THHN. For Max Size, enter 2000. For Neutral Multiplier, enter 1.0. Select Neutral Required. For Neutral Size, select Hot Conductor Size. For Conduit Type, select Steel.

Add a voltage definition 5 In the left pane, select Voltage Definitions. The Voltage Definitions table is used to specify a range of voltages that are used with your voltage definitions. By specifying a range, you allow circuits to be created between components with rated voltages that do not precisely match the voltage definition value. 6 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter 240. For Value, enter 240. For Minimum, enter 220. For Maximum, enter 250.

Add a distribution system 7 In the left pane, select Distribution Systems. Note the 3 distribution systems listed. 8 Click Add and in the Electrical settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter 120/240. For Phase, select Single. For Wires, select 3. For L-L Voltage, select 240. For L-G Voltage, select 120.

Specify demand factors 9 In the left pane, select Demand Factors. You can specify demand factors that let you adjust the rating of the main service for the building. 10 In the Electrical Settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Load Classification, select Power. Under More Than, select 10000 VA. Click Split. Select 20000 VA and for Demand Factor, enter 50. Click OK.

11 Close the file with or without saving it. Next you create a schedule to define required lighting levels. Then you assign lighting levels to spaces.

Specifying Electrical Settings | 159

Defining Required Lighting
In this exercise, you specify the lighting levels that are required for the different spaces within the building, such as offices, restrooms, and conference rooms. You begin by adding a new Project Parameter (Required Lighting Level), then you create a Key Schedule that links your new parameter to the various types of spaces in your project. Key schedules provide an efficient way to create an instance parameter that can be used to map specific parameter values to particular key styles. In this case the key style is the type of space and, because the key is linked to your new project parameter, its value becomes the Required Lighting Level. Later in the tutorial, you will use the new parameter again to compare the value for Required Lighting Level against the actual illumination provided by fixtures that you place in the plan. Training File
■ ■

On the Quick Access toolbar, click

(Open).

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_02_i.rvt.

Add a project parameter for lighting 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. 2 In the Project Parameters dialog, click Add. 3 In the Parameter Properties dialog, under Parameter Data:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter Required Lighting Level. For Discipline, select Electrical. For Type of Parameter, select Illuminance. For Group Parameter Under, select Electrical - Lighting. Under Categories, select Spaces. Verify that Instance is selected. Click OK twice. The Required Lighting Level project parameter has been added and will appear as an instance parameter for all spaces, under the Electrical - Lighting group in the space element properties.

Verify the new parameter 4 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2 - Lighting Plan. 5 In the drawing area, zoom in on the lower left corner and use the crosshair as a guide to select Space 218.

6 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.

160 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

7 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Electrical - Lighting, note the Required Lighting Level parameter. Click OK. Create a schedule for required lighting levels 8 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 9 In the New Schedule dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Category, select Spaces. For Name, enter Space Lighting Requirements. Select Schedule Keys, and for Key Name, enter Lighting Levels. Click OK.

10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available Fields, double-click Required Lighting Level, and click OK. The schedule displays and includes a title and column headings. 11 Double-click the column boundary to the right of each column to adjust the column to fit the text.

Add space lighting requirements to the schedule table 12 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New. 13 In the Key Name column of the first row, enter Open Office. 14 In the first row of the Required Lighting Level column, enter 45. 15 Adjust the column boundaries as needed.

16 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New to add 13 more rows. 17 Complete the table by entering the following:

The fc value is automatically applied as the parameter is based upon illuminance parameter type, which is mapped to project units. Notice that as you enter the data, the rows are automatically sorted by Key Name. You can change the sort/grouping to sort by Required Lighting Level.

Defining Required Lighting | 161

Change the sort order of the schedule 18 Right-click in the schedule and click View Properties. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog, for Sorting/Grouping, click Edit. 20 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■

For Sort By, select Required Lighting Level. Select Blank Line.

21 Click OK twice. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Required Lighting Level.

22 Using the same method, change the sort order back to the default setting. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Key Name. Apply a lighting level to spaces 23 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 - Lighting Plan. 24 Zoom to Space 218 and select the space element.

25 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Note that under Electrical-Lighting, that Required Lighting Level is blank. 26 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Identity Data, for Lighting Levels, select Instruction-Standard. Notice that the Required Lighting Level now has a value of 50 fc and the field is dimmed, since the Lighting Level is set to use the value assigned to the Instruction-Standard key value. The

162 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

only way to change the value is to either select a different Lighting Level key, select None for Lighting Level and type a specific value, or edit the Required Lighting Level key schedule for the selected key. Since Required Lighting Level is an instance parameter, the value input applies only to the selected space. 27 Click OK. You can apply a key schedule to multiple spaces at the same time by selecting the spaces and specifying the lighting levels in the Electrical properties dialog.

28 Close the file with or without saving it. Next you create a color fill scheme for space lighting.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules
Revit MEP lets you add color fills to spaces based on specific space parameters. Space color fill plans and schedules can be helpful as design tools and as design communications documents. In this exercise, you will create a space color fill plan using the lighting levels that you specified in the previous exercise. Space color fills can be used with any parameter that exists for the space components. Later in this exercise, you create a space lighting analysis schedule to aid in the layout of your lighting design. The schedule includes a calculated lighting delta value, which is the difference between the required and the calculated illuminance values. Training File
■ ■

On the Quick Access toolbar, click

(Open).

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_03_i.rvt.

Create a color fill legend scheme 1 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Color Schemes. 2 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■

Under Schemes, for Category, select Spaces. Under Schemes, click (Duplicate).

3 In the New Color Scheme dialog, for Name, enter Required Lighting and click OK. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■

Under Scheme Definition, for Title, enter Required Lighting Levels. For Color, select Required Lighting Level, and click OK to dismiss the alert message.

5 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:

Under Scheme Definition, verify the By Range is selected.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 163

Select the scheme for At Least 20.00 fc, and click (Add Value). This command adds a new value based on the split value of the unit you are adding the new value after. For example, if you select the value for 20 fc and click Add, then the new value will be 40 fc. If you select the value for 20 fc again and click Add, then the new value will be 30 fc or half of the difference between the two values you are adding.

With the scheme for At Least 20. 00 fc still selected, click

(Add Value) again.

Select the scheme for At Least 40.00 fc, and click

(Add Value).

■ ■ ■

Select the scheme for 30.00 fc, and click

(Add Value).

Select the scheme for 50.00 fc, enter 75.00, and press ENTER. Select the scheme for 40.00 fc, enter 50.00, and press ENTER.

Click OK.

Add a legend and apply the color scheme 6 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2 - Lighting CF. 7 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. 8 In the drawing area, click to place the legend to the right of the drawing. 9 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■ ■

For Space Type, select Spaces. For Color Scheme, select Required Lighting. Click OK.

The color fill plan displays the required illuminance levels based on the key values previously created.

164 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

Create a space lighting analysis schedule 10 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 11 In the New Schedule dialog:
■ ■

For Category, select Spaces. For Name, enter Space Lighting Analysis and click OK.

12 In the Schedule Properties dialog, for Available Fields, double-click Number, Name, Level, Average Estimated Illumination, and Required Lighting Level. 13 Click Calculated Value. 14 In the Calculated Value dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter Lighting Delta. For Discipline, select Electrical. For Type, select Illuminance. For Formula, click Browse.
■ ■

In the Fields dialog, select Average Estimated Illumination. Click OK.

In the Calculated Value dialog, for Formula, at the end of Average Estimated Illumination, press the spacebar, type a hyphen, and click Browse.
■ ■

In the Fields dialog, select Required Lighting Level. Click OK twice.

15 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■

On the Sorting/Grouping tab, for Sort by, select Level. Select Header. Select Blank Line. On the Formatting tab, for Fields, select Lighting Delta. Click Conditional Format.

In the Conditional Formatting dialog, under Condition, for Test, select Not Between.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 165

The lighting delta values that are not within the conditional value of -5 fc and 5 fc are highlighted in red. select Red. 166 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . ■ ■ In the Color dialog. Click OK three times.■ ■ For Value. enter -5 fc and 5 fc. Click Background Color. for Custom Colors. 16 Close the file with or without saving it.

Create power loads. you verify illuminance values to indicate when the lighting level requirements have been satisfied. These values are based on internal lighting level calculations which use the space floor and wall reflectance values and workplane height to automatically calculate average illuminance or lighting levels. First. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Add devices and fixtures using schedule to satisfy required lighting levels. Balance wire sizes and breaker service. 167 . you place lighting fixtures in the drawing. Then. using the color fill plan and the space analysis schedule as an aid in lighting placement to satisfy required lighting levels. power circuits. as you place lighting fixtures. Create circuits (with and without wire) to create the logical connections between devices and fixtures. and switch systems) by establishing logical connections between electrical components. Create a panel schedule. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills In this exercise.Designing an Electrical System 8 In this lesson. Use the System Browser to check your design. you modify the color plan to illustrate the space by the Average Estimated Illumination values. you create electrical systems (including lighting circuits.

click (Open). ■ ■ ■ 5 Click OK. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ Under Schemes. select Average Estimated Illumination. then modify the color scheme legend to use the color fill plan as a design tool for many tasks. Under Scheme Definition. 168 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . select the color legend.00 fc. Modify the color fill plan 1 Verify that the Level 2 .Lighting Color Fill view is open. for Basic Colors.00 fc. click Training Files. select the color for Less Than 20. for the Spaces Category. we can quickly identify those areas of the building that do not meet the specified lighting requirements. 6 Press ESC to deselect the legend. Notice that the Library has an average estimated illumination less than 20. Click OK.Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. You can create additional color schemes. By using orange as the color for this range.rvt. 2 In the drawing area. In the left pane of the Open dialog. In the Color dialog. select Orange. 3 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_01_i.

indicating a value greater than 0 fc. 9 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. Add fixtures 14 In the drawing area. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . with the last activated window appearing in the upper-left corner.277VM_Plain Recessed Lighting Fixture 600x600 .Design ➤ Ceiling Plans and open the Level 2 .Lighting Ceiling plan. All of this works as a visual aid for the designer to insure design requirements are met.5 fc range specified in the conditional format of this field. Note that the lighting delta can be cleared. 8 In the Project Browser. 11 Click the Space Lighting Analysis view to make it active. Windows are arranged in a counter-clockwise order.7 In the Project Browser. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 169 . 13 Click the Level 2 . 17 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face. The colors will coincide with the values in the color fill legend. The color fill plan also indicates in orange an illumination value below 20 fc.5 fc range.5 fc range is satisfied. zoom to space Library 219. The order of the tiled windows is determined by the order in which the windows were activated. expand Schedule/Quantities and open the Space Lighting Analysis view.277.Lighting Ceiling Plan view to make it active. The red field will clear once the +/. The color fill will change colors as lighting fixtures are placed that raise the illumination level above 20 fc. As you add lighting fixtures to the Library. and the Lighting Delta as red for values out of the +/. 16 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x2’ (2 Lamp) . all three of these colored fields will clear to white. The schedule indicates the Average Estimated Illumination as yellow for values of 0 fc (conditional format). which is the lowest value in the specified range. however the color fill plan can display within the range below the specified value because of the +/. As you add lighting fixtures to the Library. 15 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Lighting Fixture. 10 Click the Level 2 Color Fill_Lighting Plan view to make it active. the illumination values in the color fill plan and schedule analysis will automatically update.

select Multiple. NOTE This option must be selected in order for lighting information to be updated in the color fill plan and schedule. verify that the option for Calculate Coefficient of Utilization is selected. 22 In the Instance Properties dialog. 23 Click OK. 25 On the Options Bar. 21 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. the fixtures will move accordingly. 19 Press ESC to end the command. so that as the ceiling plan moves vertically. 20 Select the lighting fixture. In the Space Lighting Analysis view. the lighting delta and average estimated illumination for space Library 219 are updated. 18 Click to place the fixture. 24 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 170 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .The Place on Face option allows the fixtures to be hosted by the ceiling plan. 26 Use the Copy command to place 2 more fixtures as shown.

NOTE Object snaps are used for selecting intersections of the ceiling grid. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 171 . 30 On the Options Bar. 31 Click in the drawing area to place 6 additional groups of fixtures as shown. 29 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 28 In the drawing area. select the 3 fixtures. select Multiple. 27 Press ESC to end the command.

Modify multiple fixture instances 34 Select the vertical center group of light fixtures. The values in the Space Lighting Analysis view are updated automatically. Note the value in red for the space Library 219. 172 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 33 Click to activate the Schedule window.32 Press ESC.

36 In the Filter dialog. click Check None. 37 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x4’ (2 Lamp) .277V. select Lighting Fixtures.35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 173 . Click OK. and for Category.

Note the changes for the space Library 219.The values in the schedule are updated automatically. 38 Click to activate the Color Fill_Lighting Plan view. 174 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

The lighting delta is satisfied. select Multiple Alignment. click the ceiling grid line as shown.39 Repeat the previous steps to change the same group of fixtures to Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) . Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 175 . 42 In the drawing area. 41 On the Options Bar. Note the changes for the space Library 219.277V. 40 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align.

The fixture aligns.43 Click the left edge of the first fixture. 44 Repeat the previous step to align the remaining fixtures. 176 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

46 Close the file with or without saving it. click Training Files.45 Press ESC to end the command. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you modify the IES data of the light fixtures with the goal of maximizing the lighting output using the fewest number of fixtures. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. In the next exercise. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 177 . and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_02_i. you modify the light fixture IES files. click (Open).rvt.

2 Tile the views as shown. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . Expand Schedules/Quantities and open Space Lighting Analysis. 6 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Click Edit Type.Create a new lighting fixture type 1 In the Project Browser.Lighting Color Fill plan.Lighting Plan. Expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 . Note the Average Estimated Illumination value of 46 fc. 4 In the Level 2 Lighting Plan view. 5 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 3 In the Space Lighting Analysis schedule view. zoom to space Library 219 and select the lighting fixture shown.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 . 178 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . scroll to view space space Library 219.

Under Electrical. select T5 [HO]. Under Identity Data. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Initial Intensity dialog. ■ In the Initial Color dialog. In the Select File dialog. select 463T5_S. click the value for Initial Intensity. the Lighting Delta for the Library is updated. click the value for Photometric Web File and click Browse. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 179 .85. enter F15. for Ballast Loss Factor. for Type Mark. Click OK. In the Name dialog. enter .00 VA.00 lm. ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Electrical Loads. for Color Preset. Under Photometrics. specify 15000. Note the lighting type has changed to F14. for Lamp. ■ Click Apply. click the value for Initial Color. select Xenon and click OK. for Apparent Load. click the value for Light Loss Factor. enter 162. Under Photometrics. Apply the lighting fixture type 8 Select all the fixtures in the center column in the Library as shown. enter . select Luminous Flux. ■ ■ ■ In the Light Loss Factor dialog.277V and click OK.■ In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ Click Duplicate. Under Photometrics. For Luminaire Dirt Depreciation. ■ Under Photometrics. 7 Press ESC to deselect the fixture.93. and click OK. ■ Click OK twice. for Name enter 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) T5_HO_54W . Note that in the Space Lighting Analysis Schedule.ies and click Open.

Remove lighting fixtures 13 Select the 3 lighting fixtures in the center column of the Library as shown. 12 Press ESC to deselect the fixtures. select Lighting Fixtures. 11 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) T5_HO_54W . 10 In the Filter dialog. Note that the selected lighting fixtures have been updated. Click OK. and that the lighting delta for the Library in the Space Lighting Analysis Schedule also has been updated.9 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. click Check None. 180 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .277V. and for Category.

16 Click the other fixtures in the center to apply the fixture type. select the top center fixture. 15 In space Library 219.Press Delete. Apply the fixture type to other fixtures 14 Click Modify tab ➤ Clipboard panel ➤ Match Type. Note the lighting delta updates again. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 181 .

Remove lighting fixtures 18 Select the 2 lighting fixtures as shown.17 Click Match Fixtures tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. Note that the lighting delta for the Library has been updated again. 182 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

Placing Switches. and Receptacles | 183 .rvt. Junction Boxes. click (Open). click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_03_i. and receptacles to your design. Placing Switches. 19 Close the file with or without saving it. The lighting delta has been updated and is now 0. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Junction Boxes.Press Delete. In the next exercise. and Receptacles In this exercise you add switches for the lighting switches and the receptacles in your project. junction boxes. The procedure for placing switches and receptacles is the same as for placing any hosted components in Revit MEP. Place lighting switches 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. you add switches. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. 2 In the drawing area.

277V.Regular Voltage: Passive Infrared . it is only previewed when the cursor is over a wall. 6 Position the switch on the interior wall as shown. Because the switch requires a wall to serve as the host. 4 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Wall Occupancy Sensor . 184 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 5 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Placement tab ➤ Place on Vertical Face.3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting. 7 Click to place the switch.

Select Junction Boxes . The element type Junction Boxes . 13 Position the junction box in space Computer Lab 222 as shown. Place junction boxes 10 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture.rfa and click Open. 11 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family. 12 In the Load Family dialog.NoLoad. 9 Press ESC to end the command.NoLoad: 4” Square is selected in the Type Selector. and Receptacles | 185 . Junction Boxes.8 Place a second switch of the same type on the other side of the wall as shown. browse to Revit MEP ➤ Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ Power Devices. Placing Switches.

zoom to space Library 219. Click Edit Type. 21 In the drawing area.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 Power Plan view. enter 9’0”. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Power . note that Apparent Load is set to 0. Place wall-hosted receptacles 19 In the Project Browser. 18 Press ESC to deselect the junction box. NOTE When entering values. Click OK twice. 17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Under Constraints. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. 16 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. enter JB-1NL. for Level 2 .14 Press ESC to end the command. In the Type Properties dialog. 186 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 20 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden to close other views that may be open. 15 Select the junction box. Under Electrical.Offset. note the Number of Poles is 1. you can enter a space to separate the unit values. for Mark.

23 In the System Browser. and Receptacles | 187 . Select Size. expand Unassigned and scroll space Library 219. Junction Boxes. Right-click the column heading again and click View ➤ Electrical. NOTE If necessary. Space Number. Note that the values for the space Library 219 are currently blank. Expand Electrical. right-click the a column heading and click View ➤ Systems. dock the System Browser at the bottom of your window. Placing Switches. Distribution System. Select Load. Space Name. Expand General. 25 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Check None. right-click and click Column Settings. and Number of Elements. and Voltage.22 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. This list displays connectors and circuits that have not been assigned to a panel. 24 For any column. Click OK. 26 In the System Browser.

188 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 28 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Duplex Receptacle: Standard.27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 33 Position the cursor on the Move Witness Line grip as shown. 34 Drag the grip to move the witness line to the receptacle on the left as shown. 29 Click to place 2 receptacles in space Library 219 as shown. Reposition the receptacle 32 Select the receptacle on the right. 35 Select the dimension and enter 12’. 30 Scroll the System Browser to see the added receptacles. 31 Close the System Browser.

select Copy and Multiple. 36 Press ESC to deselect the receptacle. and Receptacles | 189 . 40 On the Options Bar. 38 Select the receptacle. 39 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. Place additional receptacles 37 Repeat the previous steps to place a third receptacle in space Library 219 as shown. Junction Boxes.The receptacle on the right is repositioned according to the dimension you enter. Placing Switches.

42 Move the cursor down. enter 12’ and press ENTER to place another receptacle. and enter 12’ and press ENTER.41 Click the midpoint of the receptacle. 190 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . move the cursor along the wall.

43 Press ESC to end the command. Placing Switches. and Receptacles | 191 . Junction Boxes.

46 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face. 47 Click to place 3 floor receptacles as shown. 45 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select Duplex Receptacle: Standard. 192 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .Place floor-hosted receptacles 44 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture.

Next you create lighting circuits and show wire. you need to create logical connections to define the topology. Although the connections between this type of equipment are not typically shown on plans.48 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire In this exercise you add the electrical equipment for the distribution systems in your plan. The following diagram shows the connectivity for your electrical Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 193 .

Adding wiring to a project is optional. 2 In the drawing area. In this exercise you also become more familiar with the wiring settings. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_04_i. then create lighting circuitry and add wiring as the circuits are created. zoom to the space Electrical 220. main distribution panels (H-2 and MDP).rvt. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Electrical Equipment. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. and work toward the higher voltage. click (Open). Add panelboards 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open. 194 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .equipment. You start at the low voltage panels (L-1 and L-2).

5 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Placement Panel ➤ Place on Vertical Face. 7 Press ESC to end the command. 10 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 12 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard.Surface: 100A. enter PP-2B. #1 Pole Breakers. select 480/277 Wye. 11 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Electrical . for Max. select 120/208 Wye. 15 On the Options Bar.4 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select 208V MCB Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . for Distribution System.Surface: 100A panelboard as shown. For Panel Name. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.Loads. 9 On the Options Bar. 13 Repeat the previous steps to place a 480V MCB Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . Click OK. enter 20. 6 Click to place the panelboard as shown. 8 Select the panelboard. 14 Select the panelboard. for Distribution System. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 195 .

22 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. Click OK. click Check None. and for Category. 196 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .Loads. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 Lighting Plan view. Add a circuit with wire 19 In the Project Browser. 21 Select all fixtures and switches in the space. ■ 18 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard. enter 20. Note that Apparent Load Phases are dimmed because they are calculated values. select Lighting Devices and Lighting Fixtures. enter LP-2B. Click OK.17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . for Max. For Panel Name. 24 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. which is the logical connection between the elements. 23 In the Filter dialog. 20 In the drawing area. zoom to space Instruction 221. The blue sketch graphics show the created circuit. #1 Pole Breakers.

26 Select lighting panel LP-2B. 27 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. The red sketch graphics show the logical circuit with the home run pointing toward the selected panel. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 197 .25 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel.

198 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .28 Press ESC to end the command. 31 Click to place the switch in the drawing area as shown. Add a switch 29 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting. 30 Click Lighting Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select Lighting Switches: Three Way. 33 Select the switch on the right. 32 Press ESC.

Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 199 . right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit. 35 Select the left three-way switch.34 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel and select Lighting Switches: Three Way from the Type Selector drop-down. 36 Click the top-left lighting fixture to add to the circuit.

and for Category. 44 Close the file with or without saving it. enter 2. except without wire. Click OK. 41 In the Filter dialog. Note that the tick marks are updated to show 4. 43 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . 38 Press ESC to end the command. Training File ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. click Check None.37 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. for Hot Conductors. Click OK. 200 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Next you create circuits without showing wire.Loads. 40 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire This exercise is similar to the previous exercise in that you create circuits. select Wires. click (Open). 39 Select all items in space Instruction 221. 42 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.

Add a circuit without wire 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 201 . 6 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. 8 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Select Panel. 9 Select panel LP-2B in space Electrical 220. right-click on the Systems heading. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_05_i. Voltage. and then expand circuit 1. 4 Right-click the connector and click Create Power Circuit. Click OK. 15 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ Expand General and review the settings. Check circuits 11 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. and Voltage Drop are selected. 14 Right-click on the Systems heading and click Column Settings. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. and verify that Load. 5 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. expand Power. click Training Files. ■ 16 In the System Browser. Expand Electrical. and click View ➤ Systems and Electrical. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right and the lighting sensor. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 2 In the drawing area. 12 Move the System Browser pane to the bottom of the screen for easier viewing. Rating. zoom to space Computer Lab 222.rvt. 17 Scroll down and expand LP-2B. 13 In the System Browser. Distribution System.

zoom to space Computer Lab 222. 27 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 30 Close the System Browser. 26 Select the 4 remaining lighting fixtures and the other occupancy sensor in space Computer Lab 222. 20 Select the junction box and click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. 28 Select one of the occupancy sensors. 29 Move the cursor over one of the fixtures and press TAB 3 times to view the circuit. under Electrical. 22 With the junction box still selected. change the Voltage to 277V. 25 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. Add additional devices to the circuit 19 In the drawing area. View circuit information 24 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. Click OK. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to a panel. 23 Move the cursor over one of the adjacent fixtures and click to select it. Note the addition of the junction box to circuit 2 in the System Browser.Note the circuit in space Instruction 221. 202 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 18 Expand circuit 2 and note the devices. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit.

Add tags to fixtures 31 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 203 . Click OK. 34 Click each of the 6 lighting fixtures in space Computer Lab 222. Edit tags 42 Select a tag and click Modify Lighting Fixture Tags tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. 41 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. click below the first one to place it. Notice that all 6 lighting fixture tags are updated. Click Tags. 45 Click Modify Label tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. 32 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Deselect Leader. 43 Select the label name and click Modify Label tab ➤ Label panel ➤ Edit Label. 35 Press ESC to end the command. note the label parameters and click Cancel. for Type Mark. click Edit Type. 33 In the Tags dialog: ■ ■ For Lighting Fixtures. 44 In the Edit Label dialog. 47 In the drawing area. 46 Click Place Label tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal ➤ Center and Vertical ➤ Top. enter FR4. 38 In the Instance Properties dialog. 40 Click OK twice. Click Yes. select Lighting Fixture Tag: Standard. 37 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 39 In the Type Properties dialog. under Identity Data. 36 Select the upper-left fixture.

58 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard and click Apply. 49 Click Place Label tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. Note the tag is updated in the drawing area. Add tags to remaining fixtures 54 Select all the elements in space Computer Lab 222.rfa. select Circuit Number and Switch ID and click Add parameter(s) to label . 61 Close the file with or without saving it. Click OK.48 In the Edit Label dialog: ■ Under Category Parameters. For Circuit Number. enter a comma. Next you create a switch system. 57 Click Modify Lighting Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ and select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard. 60 Zoom out to see the tagged fixtures. 53 Click Create tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. 55 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. click Check None. Click Save. Click OK. Creating a Switch System In this exercise you learn how to create a switch system. select Lighting Fixture Tags. Note the tags are updated in the drawing area. enter Lighting Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag. and click Apply. 59 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. and for Category. Deselect Break and for Suffix. 204 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Click Apply and note the label parameters are divided into 2 lines in the drawing area. 50 Drag the handle on the right side of the tag to resize it by dragging it to the left. 51 Click ➤ Save As ➤ Family. 56 In the Filter dialog. for File Name. 52 In the Save As dialog. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Wrap between parameters only. Click OK. select Break.

Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. under Electrical Lighting. 6 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. Create a switch system 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. Note that the lighting fixture tags for the two fixtures are updated with the Switch ID. Click OK. 13 Click Modify Lighting Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 4 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch. 9 Select the occupancy sensor. 10 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 5 Click Modify Switch System tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_06_i. click (Open). Creating a Switch System | 205 . click Training Files. 8 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch.rvt. 2 In the drawing area. for Switch ID. 11 Highlight the fixture and press TAB 4 times to see the switch system. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. 12 Select the occupancy sensor. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right of the space. enter a.

25 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System. 20 Select the remaining 3 lighting fixtures. 21 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch. 206 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .Lighting. enter b. 23 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Switch Properties.15 Press ESC to deselect the occupancy sensor. 19 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. 18 Click Modify Switch Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. 17 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch. under Electrical . 22 Select the occupancy sensor on the bottom side of the wall. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. Note the lighting fixture tags for the 4 fixtures below the wall are updated with the switch ID. 16 Select one of the lighting fixtures below the wall. for switch ID. Click OK.

Creating Power Loads In this exercise you will learn methods for creating power circuits (circuit groups). Add a circuit 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open. Click OK.26 Close the file with or without saving it. select the PP-2B panel. click (Open). 6 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. select Electrical Fixtures. In the left pane of the Open dialog. lighting.rvt. Next you create a circuit and size wire. 7 In space Electrical 220. Creating Power Loads | 207 . and data systems. 5 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. click Check None. Circuits are used for power. zoom to space Instruction 221 and draw a pick box to select all the components in the space. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_07_i. 3 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 4 In the Filter dialog. and for Category. The concept of grouping similar functions into systems is used to show logical connections between different components in the system. 2 In the drawing area.

Loads. 18 For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. and in the right pane. and in the drawing area. 208 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . and click Element Properties. 10 Right-click the wire for the home run to the panel. navigate to Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks. select Wiring. select Hook Wire Tick Mark. Notice the 3 tick marks is changed to 4 tickmarks. 19 Click OK. 11 In the Instance Properties dialog. 12 Press ESC to deselect the wire. select Long Wire Tick Mark. 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. for Hot Conductors. select Hook Wire Tick Mark. click the minus symbol to delete a tick mark. 9 Press ESC to deselect the wires.rfa. 17 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. 15 In the Load Family dialog. under Electrical . 14 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. enter 2.8 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. and click Open. Click OK. for Ground Wire Tick Mark. 13 Select the wire again.

and click to select the circuit. press Tab to display a preview of the circuit wiring. 24 Press ESC to deselect the wires. 23 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. Combine multiple homeruns into a multi-circuit homerun 20 Highlight one of the receptacles in space Computer Lab 222. 22 In space Electrical 220. Creating Power Loads | 209 . 21 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. as shown. select the PP-2B panel. 25 Select the homerun from space Computer Lab 222 and the wire between the first and second receptacle in space Instruction 221.The tick mark for all ground conductors are changed to a hooked tick marks and neutral conductors display as a long tick mark.

Notice that there are now 4 tick marks on the homerun and the wiring for space Instruction 221 and a double arrowhead to indicate the multi-circuit homeruns. in space Instruction 221. click the connector of the first receptacle. There are only 3 tick marks 210 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . as shown.26 Press Delete. 27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Wire drop-down ➤ Arc. add another wire between the connector on the last receptacle in 221. 28 In the drawing area. click a point halfway between the first and second receptacle to create an arc. 29 In space Instruction 221. and the connector on the nearest receptacle in space Computer Lab 222. and then click the connector of the second receptacle as shown.

31 Close the file with or without saving it. Next you balance the loads for your design. click Open. and connect its wiring to a receptacle in space Instruction 221. you verify and adjust wire sizes that Revit MEP recommends for handling the loads on those circuits. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_08_i. This will reduce neutral current as well as prevent an excess voltage drop due to one phase being overloaded. Notice the triple arrowhead for the homerun. select panel LP-2B. click Training Files. then you examine the loads presented at the panels to set your final breaker sizes. zoom to space Electrical 220. Balance circuit loads 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. An additional hot conductor is added to the 221 wiring. Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service | 211 .rvt.on the wiring that extends to the space Computer Lab 222. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Balancing loads begins with adjusting the loads at the panels farthest from the power source. Circuit loads should be balanced to present as nearly as possible an equal load to each phase. Finally. 3 In the Electrical space. Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service In this exercise you begin by balancing the loads at the Level 1 and Level 2 panels. 2 In the drawing area. 30 Add wiring to space Electrical 220. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

A warning indicates that the power system is empty and will be deleted. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit: ■ ■ Scroll down and note the current value for the Wire Size parameter is 3-#12. 6 Click OK. Scroll down. and Phase C . Phase B 3636 VA. for Rating. Click OK. 11 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Remove from Circuit. and Phase C provides 2028 VA. Revit MEP automatically calculates wire sizes based on circuit rating. 1-#12. 1-#10. Verify and adjust wire sizes 7 With panel LP-2B still selected. and note the value for the Wire Size parameter is now 3-#10. while Phase B provides 2004 VA. 13 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. B. 1-#12.4 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Circuits. 12 Select panel PP-2B. The loads are now more evenly distributed over the three phases (Phase A . Notice that the loads on Phase A.3616 VA). 14 Close the warning dialog. ■ ■ Adjust circuit breaker sizes 9 Select panel PP-2B. click Rebalance Loads. 212 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 5 In the Edit Circuits dialog. enter 30A. 1-#10.3712 VA. click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Circuit Properties. and C shows an imbalance with the heaviest load 6932 VA on Phase A. Under Electrical-Loads. 10 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit.

16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. 18 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. Creating a Panel Schedule In this exercise. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Creating a Panel Schedule | 213 . 21 With panel PP-2B still selected. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_09_i. 17 Close the warning dialog. The Panel Schedule Report appears in a new window. you create a panel schedule report for panelboard MDP-1.Loads. under Electrical . and click OK.Loads. Next you create a panel schedule. 24 Select the transformer TP-2B. click (Open).15 Select panel PP-2B. Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. click Training Files. for Rating. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit.rvt. A warning indicates that the total connected load exceeds 80% of the defined value of 20A for the circuit you are creating. 3 In the Select Panels dialog: ■ ■ ■ Click Clear Selection. 23 With panel PP-2B still selected. 25 Press ESC to deselect the panel. under Electrical . In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports and Schedules panel ➤ Panel Schedule. for Rating. Click OK. enter 25A. 22 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. Panel PP-2B is now reconnected to transformer TP-2B. Create the panel schedule report 1 Verify that the Level 1 Power Plan is open. The circuit breaker size for panel PP-2B is now sized to handle the connected load. enter 30A. 20 Click OK to close the warning dialog. click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. and click OK. Select PP-2B.

click Edit. 214 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . select Berlin Sans FB. under Reports ➤ Panel Schedule. 5 In the Project Browser. Checking Your Design In this exercise you learn how to use the System Browser to examine the circuitry that you created in previous exercises. click (Open). select Bold and Italic. 4 Close the report. enter 3/32. click Training Files. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_10_i. and open E601 . 6 In the Project Browser.Panel Schedules. This dialog allows you to control how the panel schedule report displays when it is included on a sheet. 11 Click OK twice.NOTE If a panel schedule has already been created for a panel. drag PP-2B onto the sheet. Under Body Text. for Font Size. 8 Click Modify Schedule Graphics tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. for Appearance.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. The Panel Report Appearance dialog displays. 7 Select the schedule. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog. under Other. You also learn to use the Check Circuits tool to verify that all of the circuits in your plan are connected. expand Sheets (all). The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. for Font. Under Header Text. 12 Close the file with or without saving it. Under Header Text. the panel will not appear in the Select Panels dialog. enter 1/8. 10 In the Panel Report Appearance dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Header Text. Next you use the System Browser to check your design. for Font Size.

Note the receptacle in space Lounge 212. select space Lounge 212. and then click the receptacle to select the circuit. 3 Move the System Browser to the bottom of the drawing area.View unassigned components 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. 8 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the bottom wall. 4 In the System Browser: ■ Right-click a column heading. 12 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. and click AutoFit All Columns to resize the columns in the System Browser. press TAB once. ■ ■ 5 In the drawing area. Notice that the receptacle on the right side wall is not connected to circuit 2. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. Expand Unassigned. note that the receptacle is not connected to any circuit. Checking Your Design | 215 . 6 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the bottom wall and press TAB once. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. In the System Browser. In the System Browser. 7 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the right side wall and press TAB once. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add to Circuit. 11 Select the receptacle on the right side wall. 9 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to panel PP-2C. There are 4 devices connected to circuit 2. Check circuits 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Circuits. Expand Power ➤ PP-2C ➤ circuit 2. notice that PP-2C for circuit 2 is updated. each with a load of 180VA.

Notice that panel LP-2C is not connected. 216 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 23 Close the file with or without saving it. under Warnings. 17 In the drawing area. 21 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 19 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Systems Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. 20 On the Options Bar. 18 Select panel LP-2C. zoom to space Electrical 214. select MDP-1. 22 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. for Panel.14 In the warning window that is displayed indicating an unconnected power connector. 16 Close the details dialog. 15 In the dialog. Panel LP-2C is now connected to the main distribution panel MDP-1. click (Expand warning dialog) to view details of the warning. expand the warning category for Circuit is not assigned to a panel ➤ Warning 2.

you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a plumbing system. 217 .Creating a Plumbing System In this tutorial.

218 .

you create a PVC pipe type. Loading pipe fittings required by the plumbing system. You load the families of components that are required for your plumbing systems. click Training Files. Specifying default sanitary piping settings for the main and branch piping. click Duplicate. type PVC .Design is open. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing\RME_Plumb_Planning_01_i. Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Vent. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types.Planning a Plumbing System 9 Creating plumbing systems in Revit MEP is similar to any design project. you prepare to design the plumbing system by: ■ ■ ■ ■ Creating a PVC Sanitary Pipe type. Adding a pipe size.Plumbing Plan . and click Properties. In this exercise. and click OK. right-click PVC . 2 In the Project Browser.Design ➤ Floor Plans. Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System Revit MEP provides families of common plumbing components that you place in your plumbing plan. In this lesson. 3 In the Type Properties dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. and verify that Level 1 . and specify the default fittings that will be used with this type. 4 In the Name dialog. planning is critical to a successful design.rvt. in addition to loading existing families.Sanitary. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . 219 .

Load piping component families 7 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. click Modify. 13 In the right panel. select None.Vent is listed. select Sanitary.DWV. 27 For the new pipe size.0''. PVC . 24 For Inside Diameter.Sch 40 . Tee. Tap. 23 In the Add Pipe Size dialog. click Training Files. For Offset.DWV: Standard. click Pipe Settings. 16 Specify settings for the Main sanitary piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. select Tee.5 In the Type Properties dialog. Add a pipe size 20 In the left pane. 19 Specify the same settings for the Branch sanitary piping as you used for the Main. for Material. select Pipe Settings ➤ Sizes. Cross. 18 For System Type. and click OK.PVC . 8 Click Place Pipe Fitting tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family. 22 Click New Size. select Branch. 15 For System Type. 6 Click OK.Sch 40 . under Pipe Types. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. select Tee Vent . select Tee Reducing Double Vent . 17 In the left pane. and click Main. 9 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. and open Imperial\Families\Trap P . verify that Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing are selected.PVC .rfa. 10 On the Selection panel. for Nominal. select Plastic. enter -4' . refer to Revit MEP Online Help. 26 Click OK. for: ■ ■ ■ ■ Preferred Junction Type. 21 In the right pane. enter 5/8''. under Mechanical.DWV: Standard. 14 Expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. 12 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. enter 27/32''. select Pipe Types: PVC Sanitary. In the Project Browser. NOTE For additional information on the Mechanical Settings. Specify sanitary piping settings 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ . enter 1/2''. for Pipe Connector Tolerance. 220 | Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System .PVC . enter 10°. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. DWV represents Domestic Waste Vent. 25 For Outside. select Sanitary.Sch 40 . The new pipe type is listed in the Project Browser under Families ➤ Pipe Fittings.

and hot and cold water piping. vent.Designing a Plumbing System 10 In this lesson. 221 . Add a sanitary and vent stack to the system. add a hot water heater. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place sanitary plumbing fixtures. Create the cold water system. Create the sanitary plumbing system. Create the hot water system. and create piping to physically connect the sinks to the hot water system. and add piping to physically connect the fixtures to the system. sanitary piping. Create piping to connect sinks to the sanitary system. you design the plumbing system for the Level 1 men’s room in a commercial building. including plumbing fixtures.

and a floor drain to the level 1 men’s room.Design ➤ Floor Plans. you add 2 toilets. 222 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .Design is open. move the cursor over a space and refer to the tooltip or the Status Bar for information.Plumbing Plan . click Training Files. 2 Zoom in to the bottom middle area of the floor plan. Place wall-mounted toilets 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. including the men’s room (space Male 107). expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .rvt.Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures In this exercise. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_01_i. as shown. You place 3 sinks in a later exercise. 1 urinal. NOTE To identify a space name and number. and verify that Level 1 . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.

5 On the Placement panel.1. under Water Closet . as shown. Reference lines are included in the plan view to make it easier to place components. verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected. 6 Click to place a toilet in the accessible toilet space. Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 223 . select Public .The men's room is partitioned for 2 toilet stalls. against the left wall. centered on the bottom horizontal reference line. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture. and 3 sinks. in the Type Selector. 1 wall-mounted urinal.6 gpf. 4 On the Element panel.Flush Valve .Wall Mounted.

10 Click to place the urinal in the space above the 2 toilet spaces. under Urinal . NOTE If it is difficult to align the urinal to the reference line. (Again. Place a wall-mounted urinal 9 In the Type Selector.7 Click to place another toilet.Wall Hung.) 8 Press Esc. use the reference line to center the fixture. select 3/4'' Flush Valve. 224 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . zoom in closer. and press Esc. above the first in the standard toilet space.

14 Click Modify. 13 Click to place the drain above and to the right of the accessible toilet (at approximately 6'' and 6'' from the intersection of the reference lines for the 2 toilet areas).Rectangular. you select the floor as the face because this is a floor mounted drain. click Place on Face. under Floor Drain .Place a floor drain 11 In the Type Selector. In placing the fixture. Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 225 .2'' Drain. select 5''x5'' Strainer . 12 On the Placement panel.

20 Expand the Default Domestic Cold Water folder. You then use Revit MEP’s Layout Path tools to create sloped piping to connect the fixtures to a sanitary outlet. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_02_i. The default systems contain the fixtures that you placed. 16 Click the title bar for the browser. a urinal. and notice that the drain is not included because it does not have a cold water connector. 226 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . The fixtures are included in the default system based on the connectors included with the components (sanitary connectors and cold water connectors). 17 If all disciplines are displayed. and click View ➤ Piping. and notice that there are 2 default systems: Default Sanitary. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and dock it by dragging it to the bottom of the drawing area. Creating a Sanitary System This is the first of 3 exercises that guide you through creating the piping for the men’s room sanitary plumbing system. 18 Expand the Unassigned folder. In this exercise. and a floor drain. you create a sanitary system consisting of the toilets. right-click in the System Browser table heading.rvt. 21 Close the file with or without saving it. 19 Expand Default Sanitary. click Training Files. and Default Domestic Cold Water. and review the components listed under this system.Open the System Browser 15 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser.

open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . clear Lines (<Overhead>). 5 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing. 7 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. draw a selection box around the fixtures in the men's room. Creating a Sanitary System | 227 .Create the sanitary plumbing system 1 In the Project Browser. starting in the lower left and moving to the upper right corner. and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen. 8 In the Filter dialog. 2 In the Project Browser. verify that Plumbing Fixtures is selected. 4 Zoom in to the plumbing fixtures in both views. Only plumbing fixtures are selected. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . and verify that Level 1 .Design ➤ Floor Plans. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 6 In the plan view.Plumbing Plan . and click OK.Design is open.

If you deselected the drain. for System Name. The fixtures you selected all have sanitary connectors. You include the bathroom space number in the name. 11 On the Options Bar. click Finish Editing System.9 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Sanitary. enter Sanitary 107. so the Create Sanitary System is available. and the empty default sanitary folder is deleted. All of the fixtures except for the drain also have cold water connectors. 12 On the Edit System panel. 10 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. the Create Cold Water System option would also be available. 13 In the Systems Browser. and notice that Sanitary 107 is listed. 228 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . The components that were listed under the default system are now included in the Sanitary 107 system. expand Sanitary.

16 In the Select a System dialog. select one of the components in the system. Creating a Sanitary System | 229 . A preview of the piping layout displays. The base is placed. and click OK. a toilet. for example. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Place Base.Create physical connections 14 In the plan view. as shown. The base creates a vertical pipe for the system to connect into and establishes a source or an outlet for flow. at the midpoint of the detail lines. select Sanitary 107. 18 Click to select a point to the left of the accessible toilet. 15 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout.

click Solutions. 21 On Options Bar. for Slope. 26 On the Options Bar. The elevation of the base with relation to the other components in the system is critical. You override the default pipe settings before applying the recommended pipe layout. for Solution Type. 230 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 27 Click Modify. and click OK. it is helpful to be able to change the defaults as you work. and for Offset. for Diameter. click (Next Solution) until Solution Type 2 of 7 is selected. enter -4'-0”. select Main. enter -1' 0''. select 4''. When laying out a number of different systems with different offset requirements.19 On the Options Bar. select Branch. 25 On the Options Bar. and modify it to meet project requirements. The elevation is specified low enough to allow sloping of the sanitary piping in the system. select Intersections. The default settings are automatically modified. enter -1' 0''. for Offset. and click Settings. The positive value slopes the pipe down toward the base point. 24 In the left pane. 20 On the Generate Layout panel. 23 For Offset. You accept this suggested solution. 22 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. enter 1/8'' / 12''.

select the vertical route path segments. and move the cursor to the left to align all 4 segments to the base point.Customize the suggested layout 28 While pressing Ctrl. 29 Click the move parallel control (4-way arrow). Creating a Sanitary System | 231 .

as shown. as shown.30 In the 3D view. 232 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 31 Click Modify. 32 Select the vertical branch line for one of the toilets. and drag the line to the left to snap perpendicular to the main. use the ViewCube to orient the view.

adjust the vertical branch line for the other toilet.33 Using the previous method. Creating a Sanitary System | 233 . 34 On the Generate Layout panel. click Finish Layout.

35 Highlight one of the plumbing fixtures. When a fitting is reversed. 234 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . ■ ■ ■ ■ 1=Branch in a network 2=Branch in a network including the branch objects 3=Branch in a network up to a piece of equipment 4=Network (including fixtures) 36 Click to select the fitting to the drain. select the fitting and click to reorient it. and press Tab 4 times to check connectivity. and examine the sanitary tee to verify proper orientation.Examine the piping Complete all steps in this section in the 3D Plumbing view.

38 Close the file with or without saving it. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 235 . adding sinks in the men’s room. The slope control for every segment should indicate the slope is toward the sanitary outlet. as shown. you continue with the work from the last exercise. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System In this exercise.37 Select the pipe segment to the right of the fitting. and manually creating the piping that connects them to the sanitary system. and check the slope control.

expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_03_i.Design ➤ Floor Plans. verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected. as shown. 5 On the Placement panel.Public. and verify that Level 1 .Design is open. in the Type Selector.Plumbing Plan .rvt. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture.Rectangular. 4 On the Element panel. 2 Zoom in to the men’s room (Space Male 107). Add sinks to the layout 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 6 Click to place the sink centered on the top horizontal reference line. under Lavatory .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 236 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . select 22''x22'' . click Training Files.

9 Make 2 copies of the sink: ■ ■ ■ Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. select Multiple. ■ Move the cursor up above the top reference line. and press Enter to create a second sink.7 Click Modify. 8 Select the sink. enter 2' 4''. TIP When entering dimensions. in this step you can enter 2 4 (two space four) to specify 2' 4''. Click the right endpoint of the placement reference line for the sink to establish a start point. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 237 . you can enter a space to separate the value for feet and inches. On the Options Bar. without having to enter ' and '' symbols. For example.

238 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . Press Esc. 11 In the System Browser. 12 In the drawing area. and press Enter to create the third sink. 14 On the Edit Piping System panel. Add sinks to the sanitary system 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 16 On the Edit System panel. 15 Click the 3 sinks. click Add To System. select a component of the Sanitary 107 system.■ ■ Enter 2' 4''. 13 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. expand Sanitary ➤ Sanitary 107. and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen. click Finish Editing System.

with the tee fitting selected.Design ➤ 3D Views. and zoom in to the elbow fitting for the urinal. and click the + control on the left to upgrade the fitting to a tee. 19 In the 3D view. as shown. 22 In the plan view. notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) have been added to the Sanitary 107 system. and click Draw Pipe. double-click 3D Plumbing. Create piping to connect the sinks 17 In the Project Browser. right-click the top connector (sanitary connector). 18 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 21 Select the tee. use the ViewCube to orient the view. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 239 .In the System Browser. 20 Select the fitting. under Design ➤ Plumbing .

NOTE Piping is displayed according to color filters specified in the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. and click Apply. the pipe being drawn automatically assumes the size and elevation of the fitting. and click to draw the pipe. piping connected to the sanitary system displays in olive green. for Offset. In this example. 27 Click Modify. 25 Move the cursor up to the centerline of the middle sink. enter 1/8'' / 12''. When you press the Spacebar. for Slope.6''. 26 On the Options Bar. 240 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .23 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch off this option. press Spacebar. 24 On the Options Bar. enter 2' .

32 Select the double wye fitting. and click the lower rotate control to align the fitting parallel to the sinks.3D view shown for clarity 28 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting.Sch 40 . select Standard. and when the vertical center line displays.DWV. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 241 .PVC . 29 In the Type Selector. click to place the fitting. under Wye 45 Deg Double . 30 In the 3D view. move the cursor over the stub pipe. 31 Click Modify.

and press Enter. on the Options Bar. 39 Draw the pipe as shown: ■ Draw at a 45 degree angle up and to the right. 242 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . In the next steps.33 With the fitting selected. 37 Select the fitting. double-click the section head to open the section view. right-click the right connector. enter 6''. Add pipe stubs to the double wye 35 In the plan view. zoom in to the double wye fitting. enter 1'. 34 Press Esc. you add pipe segments to the double wye. 36 In the section view. 38 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch on this option. and press Enter. for Offset. and click Draw Pipe.

as shown. 42 Click Modify. 41 Using the same method. draw similar piping for the left sink (the first segment angled at 135°). ■ Move the cursor horizontally to the right until the end of the pipe segment intersects with the centerline of the right sink.Entering a length dimension while drawing pipes activates Revit MEP’s listening dimension tool. 40 Click Modify. and click to place the pipe. which automatically sets the length of the pipe to the value entered. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 243 . 43 Select the center vertical pipe in the double wye fitting.

46 In the section view. draw a 6'' pipe for the other 2 sinks.44 Drag the upper control until the pipe aligns with the centerline of the horizontal piping. 48 Click Modify. draw a selection box around the left sink to select it. and press Enter to create the segment of pipe. and press Esc. 47 Move the cursor down. enter 6''. 244 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and click Draw Pipe. 49 Using the same method. right-click the bottom connector. press Spacebar. Add P-Trap Fittings 45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile so you can see all 3 views.

53 Using the same method. click to place the P-Trap at the endpoint of the stub pipe for the top sink.50 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. place a P-Trap on the other 2 sinks. You can see in the 3D view that it is connected.PVC . and click the rotate control 3 times to orient the pipe toward the double wye piping.Sch 40 .DWV. 52 In the plan view. select Standard. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 245 . under Trap P . 51 In the Type Selector. select the P-Trap on the left. 55 In the 3D view. rotate the P-Trap for the other 2 sinks. You adjust the orientation after placing all 3 P-Traps. 54 Click Modify. 56 Using the same method.

In the plan view. right-click the left connector on the P-Trap. select the left P-Trap.. 58 Using the same method. The piping is connected and the appropriate fittings are automatically created. Click Modify Pipe Fittings tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. Move the cursor to the left. connect the right sink to the double wye. 246 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . click to select the P-Trap for the middle sink. 59 Connect the middle sink using a routing solution: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view. Click Modify.57 Finish the connection for the left sink: ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view. and press Enter. and click Draw Pipe. enter 6''. Select the double wye pipe on the left. Click in the plan view.

under Pipe Types. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 247 . and select the vertical section of pipe from the wye. Press Esc. select the section of pipe you just drew. select PVC Sanitary. and select a proposed solution. click Finish to select the recommended solution. select the 3 horizontal pipes from the sinks. while pressing Ctrl. In the Type Selector. On the Routing Solutions panel. Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Routing Solutions. ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify a slope 60 In the 3D view.■ In the 3D view. as shown. while pressing Ctrl. Routing Solutions tools are activated that let you add control points or remove control points.

for Slope. verify that 1/8'' / 12'' is selected. 65 Close the file with or without saving it.61 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Slope. click Training Files. 62 On the Options Bar.rvt. and verify the slope. 63 On the Slope Editor panel. you continue with the work on the sanitary system. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_04_i. 64 Select a pipe that you just modified. You have appropriately sloped the pipe. 248 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . In the left pane of the Open dialog. Refining the Sanitary Stack In this exercise. click Finish. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. adjusting the sanitary stack.

and click the intersection to place the fitting.Overall. and click to draw the pipe.Design.Add a vertical soil stack 1 In the Project Browser. 6 Move the cursor up to the 02 . Add a reducing wye to the stack 8 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. 9 In the Type Selector. 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing. click Modify.DWV. 4 Click the top + control to upgrade the fitting to a tee.Sch 40 . and adjust the views as necessary to view the plumbing. Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 38. 7 On the Selection panel. 2 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 5 Select the tee.Plumbing Plan . Refining the Sanitary Stack | 249 .Design.PVC . 3 In the Section view. select Standard. and open the following views: ■ ■ ■ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . select the elbow fitting on the right. under Wye Combination with 8th Bend . right-click the top connector. select the vertical stack. 10 In the 3D view. and click Draw Pipe. as shown.Floor level line. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .

enter 1'-0”. 12 Select the fitting. select Standard. 250 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 13 Click the rotate control once. 14 On the Options Bar.11 Click Modify. and click the rotate control to change the orientation. Add a pipe plug to cap the cleanout 16 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting.DWV. under Plug .PVC . for Offset.Sch 40 . as shown. click the midpoint at the end of the sanitary pipe. 18 In the plan view. 15 Press Esc. 17 In the Type Selector.

and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_05_i.Design is open. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.Design ➤ Floor Plans. The plug is added to the end to cap off the cleanout. A cleanout is required on all vertical stacks. and verify that Level 1 .19 Click Modify. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . Creating the Cold Water System In this exercise.Plumbing Plan . click Training Files. Creating the Cold Water System | 251 .rvt. Specify mechanical settings for the hot and cold water systems 1 In the Project Browser. 20 Close the file with or without saving it. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you create the domestic cold water system and add piping to connect all of the fixtures in the men’s room to the system.

draw a selection box to select the toilets. minimize the Sanitary system. 6 In the left pane. and for System Type. select Pipe Types: Water. 9 In the left pane. if necessary. 7 In the left pane. 5 Specify options for the Main hot water piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. (Remember to specify Domestic Cold Water as the System Type. and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Hot Water system. for System Type. double-click 3D Plumbing . select Branch. 252 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Cold Water system. and click OK. For Offset. you specify different offset elevations for the cold water piping and the hot water piping. select Domestic Cold Water. expand Unassigned. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. and sinks. under Design ➤ Plumbing . and click Main. select Branch. These categories include all of the components placed earlier that have relevant connectors. for System Type.Design ➤ 3D Views.Overall. To minimize opportunities for piping interference. expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. 15 In the plan view. verify that the value is 9' 0''. select Pipe Types: Water. urinal. 17 In the Filter dialog. select Domestic Hot Water. select Main. 4 In the right pane. Create the cold water system 11 In the Project Browser. click Check None. For Offset. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. and position the browser at the bottom of the screen. 8 Specify options for the Main cold water piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type.) 16 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. enter 9' 3''. select Plumbing Fixtures. select Domestic Hot Water.) 10 Click OK. 3 In the left pane of the Mechanical settings dialog. and notice that Default Domestic Hot Water and Default Domestic Cold Water systems are listed. 14 In the System Browser. (Do not select the floor drain because it does not have a hot or cold water connector.2 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ .

verify that Predominantly Flush Valves is selected. 20 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For System Name. 19 On the System Tools panel. Notice that the water main displays in blue. click Finish Editing System. indicating that it is now part of the cold water system. For Flow Conversion Method. 24 Click the horizontal water main above the toilets. notice that the Default Domestic Cold water system is removed because all of the fixtures have been added to the DCW 107 system. In the System Browser. 23 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. Expand Domestic Cold Water ➤ DCW 107 to verify the components. 21 On the Edit System panel. Creating the Cold Water System | 253 .18 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Cold Water. click Edit System. select the toilet closest to the vertical soil stack. enter DCW 107. Create piping for the cold water system 22 In the 3D view.

under Pipe Types. 27 On the Placement Tools panel. 30 In the plan view. press Spacebar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the existing pipe. and click Draw Pipe. click to the left of the urinal. and press Enter. and click to place the pipe. enter 7''. enter 3' . select 3/4''. and press Enter. verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. connect the second toilet. as shown. at the intersection of the water main pipe. 35 In the Type Selector. 26 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe. 33 Click Modify. right-click the top DCW connector. for Offset. and click the connector. 38 Move the cursor up to the top of the third sink.2 7/8''. 36 Move the cursor to the left. 29 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Diameter. 32 Move the cursor to the right. 37 On the Options Bar. enter 10'. 34 In the plan view. select the sink above the urinal. 254 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .25 Using the same method. select Water. 31 On the Options Bar. verify that Automatically Connect is selected. as shown. enter 0”/12”. enter 4'0”. For Slope. 28 In the Type Selector. for Offset. For Offset.

select Connector 1 : Domestic Cold Water : Round : 1'' : In. 41 Select the top sink.39 Move the cursor to the left. 42 In the Select Connector dialog. 40 Click Modify. and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. and click to connect to the main cold water line. and click OK. (Status Bar indicates Horizontal and [Pipes : Pipe Types : Water]). 43 Click the branch cold water pipe. The sink is connected to the cold water branch piping. Creating the Cold Water System | 255 .

add a water heater. and add piping to connect the sinks in the menu’s room to the system. connect the middle sink to the branch pipe. you create the hot water system.44 Using the same method. 45 Close the file with or without saving it. 256 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . Creating the Hot Water System In this exercise.

while pressing Ctrl.Overall. Notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) are listed. 4 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser.Plumbing Plan .Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing . 6 In the plan view. open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .rvt. and position the browser at the bottom of the screen.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. expand the Unassigned folder. 5 In the System Browser. and expand the Default Domestic Hot Water system. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select the 3 sinks. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .Design is open. 2 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. Creating the Hot Water System | 257 . and verify that Level 1 . 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. Create the hot water system 1 In the Project Browser.Design ➤ Floor Plans. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_06_i.

verify that DCW 107 is selected. Default Other folders are created and the Water Heater is listed. 12 In the Type Selector. When designing systems. Default Domestic Cold Water.Tankless. you edit the system to add equipment.6 Gallon. 8 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ System Properties. 10 In the System Browser. the Domestic Hot Water 107 system is listed along with the 3 sinks (lavatories). enter Domestic Hot Water 107. In later steps. click to position the water heater in the lower left corner of the utility room above the bathroom. as shown. and click Edit System. in the Unassigned folder. 14 Click Modify. for System Name. 13 In the plan view. select 0. 17 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel.) Add the water heater to DCW 107 16 Select a sink in the men’s room. You add the water heater to the Domestic Cold Water system first. 258 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and click OK. Default Domestic Hot Water. (The folders are created according to the connectors available on the hot water heater. Add a water heater 11 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog. a best practice to maximize operation is to assign all components to the appropriate system and clear the default folders.7 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Hot Water. 15 In the System Browser. under Water Heater .

for Offset. enter 1' 6''. Offset: 4' 6''. Creating the Hot Water System | 259 . Slope: 0''/12''. 23 On the Options Bar. right-click the middle left connector. 26 Move the cursor to the right. as shown. verify that Automatically Connect is selected. and on the Edit System panel. 24 Move the cursor up. 27 Click Modify. verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. The tankless water heater is connected to the cold water supply. select the water heater. click Finish Editing System. 19 Select the water heater. 25 On the Options Bar. specify: ■ ■ ■ Diameter: 1''. enter 10’. and press Enter.18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. and select Draw Pipe. 22 In the Type Selector. and click the water main line. 21 On the Placement Tools panel. Connect the water heater to the cold water supply 20 In the plan view.

33 On the Edit System panel. 37 On the Options Bar. and click Draw Pipe. and on the Placement Tools panel. 29 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. enter 1''. 32 Click the tankless hot water heater. and in the System Selector. as shown. 38 Move the cursor to the right. Connect the water heater to the hot water supply 34 Select the water heater. click Finish Editing System. 260 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . enter 9' 0''.Add the water heater to Domestic Hot Water 107 28 In the plan view. click Edit System. 35 On the Options Bar. select a sink. select Domestic Hot Water 107. select 4'-6''. and press Enter. and click just to the left of the cold water pipe. right-click the bottom connector (domestic hot water). click Automatically Connect to switch it off. 31 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. enter 1' 6''. 36 Move the cursor down. for Diameter. for Offset. and for Offset. 30 On the System Tools panel.

enter 2' 8''. 40 On the Options Bar. and click just above the bottom sink. as shown. enter 1’. and press Enter. 41 Move the cursor down. Creating the Hot Water System | 261 . for Offset. 42 Click Modify.39 Move the cursor down.

connect the other 2 sinks to the hot water pipe. The hot water pipe is automatically connected to the sink. 44 Select the horizontal pipe that you just drew. 262 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 45 Using the same method and the Connect Into tool.43 In the 3D view. select the left sink (the one closest to the urinal).

rvt project and view the vent piping for the plumbing system. 47 Optional: Open the RME_Plumb_Design_07_i. Creating the Hot Water System | 263 .46 Close the file with or without saving it.

264 .

265 . you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a fire protection system.Creating a Fire Protection System In this tutorial.

266 .

rvt. To learn more about linking and preparing an architectural model. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. You create a new pipe type. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file.Planning a Fire Protection System 11 The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. go to http://www. You will also check a Space Schedule that you can use to assess the coverage for the fire protection systems. In this tutorial. with Space components placed in the areas throughout the model.autodesk. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. After finishing each exercise. you begin work on the project that contains a wet fire protection system. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. 2 Right-click Standard. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. you will create a wet fire protection system for the second floor of an office building. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. Specifying Pipe Settings In this exercise. you will use a project file that has already been linked to an architectural model. and click Duplicate. you can choose to save your work. In this lesson. A copy is made of the Standard pipe type. and then you configure conversion settings that you will use when you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. see Planning Mechanical Systems in the Mechanical Systems tutorial. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. However. 267 .com/revitmep-documentation and download them. If the tutorial training files are not present. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_01_i.

Level 2 is the referenced level for the views where you will be designing. 8 In the Mechanical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. You can configure the Conversion settings at the beginning or during your project. Configure pipe conversion settings 7 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. For System Type. you create project parameters and work with schedules. For Pipe Type. The conversion settings for the Fire Protection Wet system type display. The new pipe type is created based on the Standard pipe type.3 Right-click the copy (Standard 2). However. 9 Click OK. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. for Material. and enter Fire Protection Wet. verify that 9' 0" is selected. you should configure or verify the Conversion settings before you convert a layout path. verify that Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet is listed. select Fire Protection Wet. duct. In the next exercise. For Offset. so the pipe main will be offset from level 2. and click Properties. you modify the type properties of the pipe. select Fire Protection Wet. structural beams. verify that 9' 0" is specified. select Carbon Steel. 4 Right-click Fire Protection Wet. 10 Close the file with or without saving it. For Offset. select Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion ➤ Branch. Next. under Mechanical. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 9 feet above the referenced level for the views. or architectural components. 6 In the Project Browser. For System Type. click Rename. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. NOTE Conversion settings are applied when you convert the pipe layout path to physical piping. select Main. 268 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . In the left pane. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. you created a new pipe type for the wet fire protection system and modified its type properties. In this exercise. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. You also configured the conversion settings for both wet and dry fire protection systems. you create a sprinkler zone project parameter. This offset elevation places the pipe branches at 9 feet above the referenced level for the views. and then click OK. For Pipe Type. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. This is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. Configuring the Conversion settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them during your project. Determining Zone Requirements In this exercise. You now specify the conversion settings for the pipe branches. You then assign spaces in the top portion of the plan to one zone and spaces in the bottom portion to another zone.

select space Instruction 221 as shown.Fire Protection Plan . select Fire Protection. select the upper half of the building.Design is highlighted. select Spaces. You draw a crossing window from the lower left to the upper right of the area you want to enclose. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. 8 Using a crossing window. and then click OK. right-click. For Group parameter under. the space crossing lines display. In the left pane of the Open dialog. enter Zone 1. Under Categories. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . click Add. When you highlight a space using the cursor. and click Element Properties. indicating that it’s the active view. for Name. 7 In the Instance Properties dialog. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_02_i. enter Sprinkler Zone. 5 Click OK twice. Determining Zone Requirements | 269 . click Training Files. 6 In the drawing area. for Sprinkler Zone.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 3 In the Project Parameters dialog. under Fire Protection.rvt.

select Zone 1. enter Zone 2. under Fire Protection. and then click OK. under Fire Protection. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 16 Close the file with or without saving it. to which you add various parameters. and then click OK. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_03_i. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 270 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . click Training Files. verify that only Spaces are selected. 15 Press Esc to clear the selection. 12 In the Instance Properties dialog. 13 Using the same method.9 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule In this exercise. and then access instance properties. including a calculated value parameter. and click OK. for Sprinkler Zone. filter the bottom half of the building to select only Spaces. You modify the schedules and add an embedded schedule in order to use the schedule as a design tool. 10 In the Filter dialog. you create schedules for sprinkler design. for Sprinkler Zone.rvt.

select Length.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 8 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 14 Select the new header. For Rounding. select Fire Protection. Select Schedule keys. enter Maximum Spacing. For Group parameter under. enter Light. enter Protection Area Construction Type. For Key name. click Add Parameter. For Units. For Type of Parameter. The schedule displays. enter 15.Fire Protection Plan . select Spaces. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Rows: New. create a parameter named Maximum Coverage Area that is an Area type and is grouped under Fire Protection. for Name. double-click on each column separator. ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a schedule parameter 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 11 Click OK twice. and click Field Format. Obstructed-Combustible. select To the nearest 1'. enter Sprinkler Spacing and Coverage Area Schedule. In the Maximum Spacing column. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 271 . 9 On the Formatting tab. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter data. indicating that it’s the active view.Create a key schedule 1 In the Project Browser. For Name. 6 Using the same method. click the Formatting tab. select Feet and fractional inches. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category.Design is highlighted. and on the ribbon. Click OK. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 13 To resize the column widths in the schedule. Add schedule data 12 Select the header in the Key Name column and enter Protection Area Type as the new header. select Maximum Spacing. 15 In the new row: ■ ■ In the Protection Area Type column. Click OK. Notice that the schedule name and the phase are automatically added. 7 Click OK. 10 In the Format dialog. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use project settings.

under Available fields. enter 130. Click OK.■ In the Maximum Coverage Area column. select Spaces. Specify fields and create a calculated value parameter ■ In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ On the Fields tab. Obstructed-Combustible Extra. Unobstructed Extra. Obstructed-Combustible Ordinary. enter Sprinkler Schedule. add more schedule data: Protection Area Type Light. and press Enter. Unobstructed Ordinary. based on the parameter settings you specified previously. double-click in the order listed: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Number Name Sprinkler Zone Level Area Protection Area Construction Type 272 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . Obstructed-Noncombustible Ordinary. For Name. 18 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Category. NOTE The units of measure display automatically. Unobstructed Maximum Spacing 15' Maximum Coverage Area 200 SF 15' 12' 12' 12' 15' 15' 200 SF 90 SF 90 SF 90 SF 130 SF 130 SF 15' 130 SF Create a sprinkler schedule 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. Obstructed-Noncombustible Light. Obstructed-Noncombustible Extra. 16 Using the same method.

For Units. under Other. In the Fields dialog. Select Header and Blank line. Click OK. For Then by. select Level. In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. The Minimum Sprinklers calculated value is added to the scheduled fields (at the bottom of the list). for Sorting/Grouping. select Fixed. and then use the method learned previously to select Maximum Coverage Area from the Fields dialog. select Area. For Formula. select 0 decimal place. The resulting formula is Area/Maximum Coverage Area. select Number. click Edit. 20 On the Formatting tab. 21 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use default settings. 19 Click the Formatting tab. and click View Properties. and click OK. and click Field Format. enter Minimum Sprinklers. click . for Sort by.■ ■ ■ ■ Maximum Coverage Area Maximum Spacing Click Calculated Value. select Minimum Sprinklers. 22 Click OK twice. select Sprinkler Zone. select Common. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 273 . 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. For Rounding. The Sprinkler Schedule displays. For Discipline. This calculated value parameter allows you to immediately determine what spaces meet the sprinkler design requirements. Enter the formula operator / after Area. Organize schedule data 23 Right-click in the schedule. For Type. 25 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab.

30 Click OK twice. 29 In the Schedule Properties dialog. and select Totals only. For Fields. ■ In the Format dialog. select Sprinkler Zone. 27 In the drawing area. click Edit. select Number. right-click the schedule. select Hidden field. The schedule is arranged and sorted as specified. 28 In the Instance Properties dialog. select Level equals Level 2. At the bottom of the dialog.■ ■ ■ ■ Select Header and Blank line. For Then by (second instance). 274 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . and then click Field Format. select Minimum Sprinklers. verify that Use default settings is selected. and then select Hidden field. On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Fields. for Filter by. 26 Click OK 3 times. For Fields. and click View Properties. select Grand totals. for Filter. Under Field formatting. select Level.

The schedule is filtered to show only zones on level 2. and select Totals only. for Available fields. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 275 . double-click Type. ■ ■ ■ 38 Click OK 3 times. select Embedded Schedule. 37 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Embedded Schedule tab. use click and drag to select the last 4 schedule column headers. and Count. Group schedule columns 31 In the drawing area. and enter Maximum Sprinkler Spacing and Area Coverage. click Edit. select Sprinklers. On the Formatting tab. for Fields. and click View Properties. select Count. 34 In the Maximum Coverage Area column and in the Maximum Spacing column. delete the word Maximum. under Other. For Category. 32 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Headers: Group. System Name. select Grand totals. for Embedded Schedule. 33 Click in the grouped header cell. 36 In the Instance Properties dialog. On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. select Calculate totals. Create an embedded schedule 35 Right-click the schedule. Under Field formatting. and then click Embedded Schedule Properties.

and the spacing parameter values are evident. 42 In the Instance Properties dialog. under Identity Data. 40 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile to tile the floor plan and the Sprinkler Schedule. for Protection Area Construction Type. Unobstructed. Notice that the selection you made in the schedule displays in the dialog. The parameter change is evident in the schedule. 41 In the plan view. When you change editable entries in the schedule to modify your system. Unobstructed. 45 For Protection Area Construction Type. under Identity Data. 47 In the Instance Properties dialog. under Identity Data. use a selection box to select the upper half of the building. 276 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . 46 With the space still selected. but their values are not determined. select Light. 51 In the Instance Properties dialog. 44 In the schedule. select Ordinary. Notice also that the Maximum Spacing and Maximum Coverage Area parameters that you created are listed under Fire Protection. This digital database information source is the central concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM). IMPORTANT A schedule in Revit MEP is not only a construction document but also a design tool. 49 Filter the selection for spaces only.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . select space 221 Instruction. double-click FP . 48 In the floor plan. click in the floor plan to make it the active view.Modify space properties from the schedule 39 In the Project Browser. select space 221 Instruction. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. and click OK. 43 Click Cancel. select Ordinary. notice that there is nothing specified for Protection Area Construction Type. 50 Access the instance properties. and access the instance properties. for Protection Area Construction Type.Fire Protection Plan Design. 52 Click OK. Unobstructed. you are actually editing information in a database of building information. each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project. As a result.

Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 277 .53 Close the file with or without saving it.

278 .

279 . By following the recommended workflow. Place host-based sprinklers 1 In the Project Browser. you place host-based sprinklers in a ceiling plan view. hosted to the linked architectural ceiling family. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. After finishing each exercise.FP_Ceiling to make it the active view. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_01_i.autodesk. At the end of this tutorial. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. you follow a series of exercises that teach the recommended systems design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010.Designing a Fire Protection System 12 In this tutorial. If the tutorial training files are not present. and specific techniques for designing fire protection systems in Revit MEP. As you place the sprinklers. Adding Sprinklers In this exercise. As you create the system. go to http://www. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. and double-click Level 2 . you create a wet fire protection system using a linked architectural model of a building project. click Training Files.rvt.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . methodology. You will use the sprinkler schedule that you created in a previous exercise as a design guide for sprinkler placement. you will learn various methods to quickly and precisely place sprinklers into the ceiling plan. However. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to create a fire protection system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you learn the best practices for designing systems with Revit MEP.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans. you can choose to save your work. you will understand the process.

there is insufficient space between the 2 branches to place fittings and the conversion will fail. 280 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 3 In the Project Browser. 6 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. and arrange the views so that they are tiled horizontally. open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Sprinkler Schedule. When this happens. This action aligns sprinklers so that the piping layout is more efficient. the layout path feature will attempt to create separate piping paths to the sprinklers. When there is a small misalignment. you copy and array sprinklers referencing the intersection of ceiling grids.2 Zoom in to the spaces in the lower right corner of the building. After placing the initial sprinkler. Sprinklers should either be aligned to each other or sufficiently separated to allow space for fittings. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 5 Click in the ceiling plan to make it the active view. IMPORTANT The alignment of sprinklers is critical and will affect the conversion of a layout path to physical piping in later exercises.

and select Sprinkler .Semi-Recessed Hosted : 1/2" Pendent from the Type Selector drop-down. 8 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face to place the sprinkler on the ceiling tile face. 11 In the drawing area. Continue placing sprinklers You copy the existing sprinklers to place other sprinklers in spaces 203 and 204. because the schedule indicates that each of those spaces requires a minimum of 3 sprinklers. 10 Press Esc twice. Adding Sprinklers | 281 . and click to place 3 sprinklers. place the cursor over the approximate center of the ceiling tiles. while pressing Ctrl. Notice that the sprinkler schedule updates to show the sprinklers you added in space 202.Pendent . because it calculates the number of sprinklers needed for each space and the maximum distance between sprinklers.7 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel. as shown. You can use the Minimum Sprinklers column in the schedule as guidance when you design the fire protection system. select the sprinklers that you placed. 9 In space Instruction 202.

verify that Constrain is cleared. 15 Select points in the 2 spaces to the left. and that Copy and Multiple are selected.12 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. you place non-hosted sprinklers. Also. Copies of the sprinklers are placed after you specify the end point. 282 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . as shown. and then press Esc. 14 Select the upper left corner near the copy selection as the copy start point. Notice that a border displays to indicate the copy selection. the cursor changes to indicate that the Copy tool is active. 13 On the Options Bar. Next.

and then tile the floor plan and schedule views horizontally. under Constraints. 21 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel. specify a vertical offset. 25 Click OK. enter 10' 6". open Design ➤ FP . 16 Close the ceiling plan view. and then click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. it must be positioned above the piping to which it will be connected.Place non-hosted sprinklers In this section. 200B. 22 In the 200A Corridor space.Fire Protection Plan . indicating that the design requirements for the corridor spaces have been met. enter 14' 6". and press Enter. and 200C). 20 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . by adding the minimum number of sprinklers for the 3 corridor spaces combined. 29 Press Esc. This number is determined in the schedule. 17 In the Project Browser. 28 Click the center of the existing sprinkler as the start point. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. Array sprinklers 26 With the sprinkler still selected. move the cursor to the right. enter 11. click to place a sprinkler at the beginning of the corridor as shown. Because the sprinkler is not hosted. Adding Sprinklers | 283 .FP_Ceiling view. it’s added to the space at an offset of 0' 0". 19 In the floor plan. for Offset. you place non-hosted sprinklers. you adjust the offset. Next. Because this is an upright sprinkler with its connector facing down. zoom in to the entire wing in the lower right of the building. click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Array. Notice that the schedule updates. 18 Type WT. This specifies an elevation for the sprinkler that makes it visible in the Level 2 .Design. For Number. 23 Right-click the sprinkler. and select Sprinkler-Upright : 1/2" Upright from the Type Selector drop-down. 27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Clear Group And Associate. and click Element Properties. and array the sprinklers in the 3 spaces that comprise the Corridor (200A. You place the system components based on the design requirements (sprinkler count and spacing) indicated in the schedule.

piping is necessary to perform calculations that reference the physical pipe geometry such as sizing. Unlike logical connections (systems). In the next exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. After creating the logical connection. Creating a Piping System In this exercise. In this exercise.30 Close the file with or without saving it. A system is the logical connection between system components such as sprinklers. IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. You create fire protection systems by placing sprinklers. click Training Files. you use the Layout Path tools to create the initial layout for the piping. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_02_i. However.rvt. and with piping (physical connection). verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 1 In the Project Browser. you connect the sprinklers by creating a system (logical connection). you create a wet sprinkler system and add piping to connect the sprinklers that you placed. and then creating the logical connection between these system components.Fire Protection Plan . physical connections (piping) are not required for systems designing.Design is highlighted. 284 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . indicating that it’s the active view.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . This is the recommended workflow or best practice for systems creation in Revit MEP. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses including flow and pressure. Then you simplify the layout using Modify tools from the Generate Layout tab on the ribbon to modify pipe branches prior to converting the layout to piping. you placed 2 types of sprinklers using various placement methods.

Explore the System Browser 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. IMPORTANT System components that you place are initially located under a default system category in the Unassigned folder. 4 Drag the System Browser so that it docks at the bottom of the drawing area. The wet system that logically connects the sprinklers displays in red to indicate that the new system is selected. This occurs because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed in order to perform calculations such as flow. within the Piping Systems folder. Creating a Piping System | 285 . and select Piping. Connect sprinklers with a system 7 Draw a selection box (from left to right) around the sprinklers in the office spaces. 6 Expand the Unassigned ➤ Default Fire Protection Wet 1 system to view the level 2 sprinklers that you placed in the building. as shown. 5 Right-click the header. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. click View ➤ Systems. named Fire Protection Wet. In the System Browser.2 Zoom in to the wing at the lower right of the building. they are moved from the Unassigned folder to their respective assigned system folder. As you assign sprinklers to systems. The Fire Protection Wet system is created and listed in the System Browser. 8 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Fire Protection Wet to create a fire protection wet system. all of the selected sprinklers have been moved from the Default Fire Protection Wet folder to the new system folder. and assign the selected sprinklers to it.

■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. select an initial piping layout. double-click the Fire Protection Wet 1 system listing to view the list of sprinklers. Notice that the Options Bar allows you to verify or modify the system name. TIP If you click in the drawing area and the red system display clears. select Branch. Verify that the above pipe type and offset settings are the same for Branch. and select the system. and click Select. providing system editing tools. 19 Click OK. verify that 9' 0" is specified. 16 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. 286 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . verify that Main is selected.Now that the sprinklers are logically connected. verify that Pipe Types: Fire Protection . 18 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. for System Name. In the left pane. 12 On the Options Bar. 13 In the System Browser. click Settings.Wet is selected. select a sprinkler that belongs to FP Wet_Zone2. 14 Click Finish Editing System. place the cursor over a sprinkler. 15 In the drawing area. and make preliminary modifications to simplify the piping layout. you use the System Browser to confirm and validate the system. The selected fire protection wet system highlights in red. and number of elements in the system. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 9 feet above level 2. NOTE The Generate Layout feature is available whenever a system component is selected. Revit MEP uses these settings to convert the preview layout path to physical piping. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Solutions. You also verify the pipe conversion settings that you configured earlier in this tutorial. The Edit Piping System panel displays. expand Fire Protection Wet ➤ FP Wet_Zone2 to see the included sprinklers. 10 Right-click Fire Protection Wet 1. 11 With the system still selected. indicating the logical connection. enter FP Wet_Zone2. You can now view the fire protection system hierarchy: the Fire Protection Wet 1 system logically connects the sprinklers. click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. For Pipe Type. system equipment. The Generate Layout tools are activated. and a piping layout preview displays. and on the Options Bar. press Tab. Create the initial layout The Layout Paths tools let you specify a source for the system. Next. For Offset. you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. Confirm and validate the system 9 In the System Browser.

The main piping preview connects to the base component in the stairwell. 23 For Offset. (elbow control) Creating a Piping System | 287 . 21 Click in the upper right corner of the stairwell to place the base component.20 On the Generate Layout panel. Modify the layout 26 You use the Modify tool to customize and simplify the layout. and green represents branch lines). enter -12' 0". click Solutions. click Place Base. these settings will convert the base component to a 2" riser that extends from the bottom of Level 1 up to the connection with the level 2 sprinklers (9' 0"). Use the arrow keys to view all the solutions. select 2". as shown. When the layout is finished. verify that Network is selected. The base component provides a source for the fire protection system. 25 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Solution Type. and select solution 5. for Diameter. the method for moving segments in a layout depends on the type of connection between a branch and the main piping: ■ Use (parallel movement control) to move the branch when an displays at the junction. The layout path solution displays (blue represents the main piping run. 22 On the Options Bar. 24 On the Generate Layout panel. In general.

This pipe run physically connects the wet system sprinklers for the 3 offices on level 2. 29 Click Finish Layout. and then drag the (elbow junction control) to merge the piping preview. All of the fittings required to connect the pipes to the system components are automatically generated. as shown. First drag the tee or cross junction control to the desired location. 288 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . The pipe run geometry (main and branches) is created. 27 Select the horizontal layout path segment connecting to the base point. click Modify. On the Generate Layout panel. A (parallel movement control) displays.■ Move each end separately when either a (tee junction control) or (cross junction control) displays at the junction. 28 Drag the parallel movement control up to a point between the office/corridor walls and the corridor sprinklers.

you complete the wet system by adding the remaining sprinklers to the FP Wet_Zone2 system using the Layout Path tool. select a different layout solution. you complete the level 2 wet fire protection system. You add the remaining sprinklers to the current wet system to logically connect them. and various manual pipe creation tools. or that offset elevations are incorrect. or manually modify the pipe. the Connect Into tool. Next. The most common causes of these errors are that there is insufficient space to create a pipe or a fitting.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Fire Protection. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System In this exercise. 31 Zoom in to the area with the sprinkler system.IMPORTANT Errors may occur when you attempt to create pipe geometry during layout path conversion or pipe sizing. Either relocate the system components. 32 If necessary. 33 Close the file with or without saving it. View the system in 3D 30 Open FP . Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 289 . and then you create piping to physically connect them. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines.

290 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .Fire Protection Plan .Design is highlighted. 4 Click the left plus sign to upgrade the fitting to a tee. and select the elbow fitting as shown.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 1 In the Project Browser.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 2 Zoom in. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_03_i. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 If necessary. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. click Training Files.rvt. indicating that it’s the active view.

Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 291 . Connect the sprinklers with pipe 19 Zoom to the 3 spaces at the right end of the corridor. This allows you to modify the system (logical connection). 17 Use a selection box to select the remaining 3 sprinklers. 9 On the Edit System panel. verify that Network is selected. 6 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System so that you can add sprinklers to the system. select a sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. System tools display on the Piping Systems tab. 18 Click Finish Editing System. for Solution Type. The selected sprinklers are assigned to FP Wet_Zone2. 7 On the Edit Piping System panel. and click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. 5 In the drawing area. You can confirm the sprinkler system assignment in the floor plan view or in the System Browser. click Add To System.The tee provides an open connector that will serve as a base when laying out the piping for the sprinklers in the corridor. you can select the pipe or duct. IMPORTANT After system components (sprinklers. 11 On the Generate Layout panel. 8 In the corridor. Notice that the number of system elements updates on the Options Bar. 10 Select a sprinkler in the corridor. draw a selection box from lower left to upper right around the sprinklers as shown (don’t include the last 3 sprinklers). select any sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. and so on) are logically connected by a system. and select solution 5. air terminals. 16 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 13 Click Finish Layout. click Finish Editing System. The layout automatically creates a path connecting to the tee created earlier. Add remaining sprinklers to FP Wet_Zone2 system 15 In the drawing area. mechanical equipment. 12 On the Options Bar. or a system component to display system tools. verify that Solutions is selected. 14 Close the System Browser. and pipe or duct is created. radiators.

28 In the drawing area. and then tile the views.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Fire Protection. Notice that horizontal and vertical segments of pipe were added. and select the leftmost unconnected sprinkler. 292 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 23 View the result in the 3D view. for Offset. click the intersection with the horizontal main pipe as the pipe endpoint.Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. draw pipe from the last unconnected sprinkler to the main pipe. 29 Using the same method. 25 Select the sprinkler. right-click. 24 In the Piping Plan. select 9'. zoom in to the corridor above the spaces that have piping. and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection . pan and zoom to the next unconnected sprinkler. and select the horizontal segment of main piping as shown. and then press Esc. 27 On the Options Bar. 26 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. and click Draw Pipe. 22 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into.20 Open Design ➤ FP . 21 In the Piping Plan.

32 Use the cursor to highlight a section of the pipe. it’s a visual indication that all components are connected correctly. zoom so that you can see the entire wing with the fire protection system.Layout in 2D Layout in 3D Verify connectivity 30 Close the 3D view. 33 Close the file with or without saving it. 31 In the plan view. Because the whole system highlights. and press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 293 .

Adding Vertical Supply Piping In this exercise.Fire Protection Plan . Create a section view 1 In the Project Browser. indicating that it’s the active view. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click outside the corridor wall at the stairs to specify the section line start point. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_04_i.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . you create a section view that you will use to work with vertical piping. 2 Zoom to the offices in the lower right corner. for Scale. click Training Files. ■ 6 Press Esc. 4 On the Options Bar. You also place a hose reel cabinet in the building and connect it to the supply standpipe. 294 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . Click at the staircase to specify the section line endpoint. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . 5 Draw the section: ■ In the drawing area. select 1/4" = 1'-0". 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section. Specify section properties 7 In the drawing area. double-click on the section head to open the section view.Design is highlighted. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt.

8 Right-click, and click View Properties. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Under Graphics, for Sub-Discipline, select FP - Design. For View Classification, select Design. Under Identity Data, for View Name, enter FP Section_Stair. For Default View Template, select MEP Section. Click OK.

10 In the Project Browser, right-click Design ➤ FP - Design ➤ Sections ➤ FP Section_Stair, and click Apply Default View Template. 11 Zoom to the top near the horizontal pipe. 12 If necessary, drag the top section boundary line up. 13 Select the elbow fitting, and then click the top + grip to upgrade the elbow fitting to a tee. 14 Select the tee fitting, and then right-click the top connector, and click Draw Pipe. 15 Press Spacebar. 16 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel, and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection - Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. 17 Move the cursor up, enter 7', and press Enter.

Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 295

18 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 19 Make Level 2 - Fire Protection Plan - Design the active view. Add mechanical equipment 20 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 21 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel, and select M_Hose Reel Cabinet Surface Mounted : 1"25mm from the drop-down list. 22 In the drawing area, click on the wall (host face) near the stairs to place the cabinet as shown, and then click Modify.

23 In the section view, zoom to the hose reel cabinet. 24 Select the cabinet, right-click the connector on the left of the cabinet, and click Draw Pipe.

296 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

25 Verify that Fire Protection - Wet is selected from the Type Selector drop-down. 26 On the Options Bar, for Diameter, select 2"50mm. 27 On the Placement Tools panel, verify that Automatically Connect is active. 28 Connect to the vertical pipe (using the Intersection and Horizontal snaps), and then click Modify.

29 Close the section view. Add a valve 30 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. 31 In the alert dialog, click Yes to load a family. 32 In the Open dialog, navigate to Training\Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\Gate Valve - 2-12 Inch.rfa, and click Open. 33 In the Type Selector, verify that Gate Valve - 2" is selected. 34 Select the midpoint of the horizontal pipe that extends from the cabinet, as shown, and then click Modify.

Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 297

A 2" gate valve is placed in the 2" diameter pipe.

35 Open 3D Fire Protection, and zoom in to the cabinet to see the valve in 3D.

36 Close the file with or without saving it.

298 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

Modifying Pipe Diameters
In this exercise, you modify the diameter of the pipes so that the pipes are a better fit with the design specifications. Because the pipe diameters depend on the number of sprinklers, you also create a sprinkler schedule to report the number of level 2 sprinklers. Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open ➤ Project.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_05_i.rvt.

Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP - Design ➤ 3D Views, and double-click 3D Fire Protection to make it the active view. 2 Enter WT to tile the 3D and floor plan views, and arrange them so that they’re tiled horizontally. 3 Adjust the view in both windows to view the entire fire protection pipe run as shown. You will work primarily in the floor plan view and validate the pipe geometry in the 3D view.

NOTE It is important to recognize the distinction between sizing and manually changing the diameter, height, or width. Changing the diameter, width, or height of pipe on the Options Bar is not considered sizing in Revit MEP. Sizing is performed using the Sizing tool (Sizing dialog) to size the pipe based on a series of parameters and calculations. The calculated size of a pipe is the result of the Sizing tool and not the result of a manual change of diameter, width, or height. Modify the diameter of the fire protection pipe run The majority of the pipe segments service no more than 2 sprinklers, and because the design specifications require a 1 inch diameter for pipes servicing 2 sprinklers, it’s more efficient to specify 1 inch diameter for all pipe runs, and then adjust branches servicing more than 2 sprinklers separately. 4 In the floor plan view, starting at the lower left corner of the wing, draw a selection box around the level 2 fire protection piping until just past the section line (don’t include the supply pipe or hose reel cabinet).

Modifying Pipe Diameters | 299

5 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 6 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Pipe Fittings and Pipes, and click OK. 7 On the Options Bar, for Diameter, select 1". 8 Click Modify. All selected piping is now 1" diameter.

Tag the pipes 9 In the floor plan view, zoom in to the right half of the wing (including the stairs). 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 11 Click to select a segment of pipe in the corridor. 12 If necessary, click Yes to load tags in the alert dialog, . 13 Navigate to Training\Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\Pipe Size Tag.rfa, and click Open. 14 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

Verify that Horizontal is selected. Clear Leader.

15 Place the cursor over the pipe segments shown, and after each segment highlights, click to place the tag. The tags accurately display the size of the selected pipe segments.

NOTE Tags are view specific. They display only in the view in which they were placed. Press Esc.

300 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

Modify the diameter of the main 16 In the 3D view, select the linked architectural file. 17 On the View Control Bar, click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. By hiding the linked file, you isolate the piping to make it easier to select. 18 In the 3D view, select the vertical pipe below the hose cabinet.

19 Place the cursor over the section of main pipe feeding the last sprinkler, and when the section highlights, press Tab. This highlights the piping between the vertical pipe and the last segement. 20 Click to select the main piping between these points. The main piping is selected and displays in red.

Modifying Pipe Diameters | 301

The diameter of the fire protection main piping changes. select 4".21 On the Options Bar. for Diameter. 302 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .

Modifying Pipe Diameters | 303 . 24 In the drawing area.22 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. The pipe diameter is modified. 23 Close the 3D view. and maximize the floor plan. 25 On the Options Bar. select 1 1/4". Modify the diameter of branch pipes The number of sprinklers serviced by a branch determines the pipe size used for that branch. 26 Using the same method. select the top segment of branch pipe in space Instruction 202 (next to the stairs). for Diameter. change the diameter of the other top segments to 1 1/4" to accommodate sprinklers. as shown. and then tag the piping as shown.

you created a wet fire protection system. you used various selection methods to modify the level 2 fire protection pipe run diameters. In this exercise.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ 05_Fire Protection Systems folder under Training Files. and the difference between how the software sizes pipe and how to manually modify pipe diameter. allowing you to immediately verify the pipe diameters. You added tags to pipes. 304 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . use the methods that you learned and create the level 1 fire protection wet system. The pipe run now complies with the design criteria. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. The completed fire protection system is included in the RME_FP_Design_06_i. Feel free to modify the systems or create entirely new fire protection systems. You also learned the difference between creating rigid physical pipe connections and creating logical systems. Explore different system designs and discover the power of Revit MEP. In this tutorial. You learned how to manually change the diameter of a pipe. For additional practice.27 This completes the Fire Protection tutorial. Use the same system components and parameters as you did for level 2.

Documenting a Project In this tutorial. and create schedules for construction documentation for a project. create details. add annotations and dimensions. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to create views. 305 .

306 .

you duplicate an existing floor plan view to create a duct plan view. and apply a view template. matchlines. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 3 In the Rename View dialog.Creating Documentation Views 13 In this lesson. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and view references. under Floor Plans. right-click Copy of Level 1. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click Properties.Design ➤ Floor Plans. Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 duct plan 1 In the Project Browser. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_01_i. callout views for a typical HVAC view and a detail view. You then change the properties of the new view by applying a view template. you begin the construction documentation for the building project. You select Duplicate because only model elements are included in the original view. and click OK. 2 In the Project Browser. 307 . dependent views. If the view included detail graphics. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. click Training Files. right-click Level 1. You learn to create: ■ ■ ■ ■ a duplicate plan view. a plumbing isometric riser from a 3D design view. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.rvt. Apply a view template 4 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise. you’d select Duplicate with Detailing.

3 In the Rename View dialog. 10 In the drawing area.5 In the Instance Properties dialog. 11 Click beyond the exterior wall of the wing to specify the second point. select HVAC Duct Plan-Documentation. 7 Click Create Matchline Sketch tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Matchline Properties. Duplicate a view to create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. and then press Esc. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click OK. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan.rvt. Creating Dependent Views Because large buildings cannot fit on a single sheet at 1/8" = 1' scale. Dependent views keep the primary/parent view as the working drawing and allow you to create smaller. Create matchlines Matchlines are used with dependent views. and click Apply Default View Template. more focused. verify that the top and bottom constraints are Unlimited. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. This is useful when breaking up plans with varying geometries across levels. and click Rename. You crop a dependent view to show only the area marked by the matchline. 9 Click OK. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. under Identity Data ➤ Default View Template. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_02_i. The view is automatically updated with the defined graphical style. views and put them on the sheet. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click to specify the first point of the matchline to the left of the plan and below gridline C. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. as shown. 5 Make sure Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is the active view. you use dependent views to accommodate such large buildings. to delineate splits in a large floor plan. 2 Right-click the dependent view title. 308 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . You can modify the visibility of matchlines in specific views. 4 Using the same method. 6 Click View tab ➤ Sheet Composition panel ➤ Matchline. The smaller (dependent) views inherit view properties and view-specific elements from the primary view. and the floor plan is moved to its new location in the Project Browser hierarchy. 6 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. and click OK. create dependent views for areas B and C.

16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B to the other view reference. 14 Click Finish Matchline. and then press Esc. select Double Dash 5/8". select Matchline: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Line Color. 19 In the drawing area. and click OK. 13 Press Esc twice. click above and below the modified matchline to create view references (displayed as . 17 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog.12 Draw a second matchline that spans the floor plan above gridline H. select Floor Plan: Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. Modify object styles 15 Zoom in to the left part of the upper matchline./ ---). select black. select 11. Creating view references 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ View Reference. 20 Select the upper view reference and. Click OK. In the Color dialog. Creating Dependent Views | 309 . click the current value. For Line Weight. on the Options Bar. 21 Using the same method. For Line Pattern. for Target view.

Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C 26 Open Sheet M201. 23 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. 27 Using the same method. crop the dependent views for plans B and C. and apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C to it. 28 Make Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan the active view. 310 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views .22 Add a view reference below the lower matchline. 25 Using the same method. and zoom to each of the view references. and drag Plan_A from the Project Browser onto the sheet. drag Plan_B onto Sheet M202 and Plan_C onto Sheet M203. The view references in the primary view are automatically updated as the views are placed on sheets. indicating the detail and sheet number of each view. 24 Use the grips on the crop lines to modify the view boundaries. as shown.

for View Classification. click Training Files. 6 In the Project Browser. select Plumbing. 5 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. select Plumbing Isometric.rvt. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 311 . You pin the view to keep it from being moved inadvertently. press Tab twice to highlight the pipe run. you copy a 3D design view and modify it to create a 3D plumbing isometric riser for domestic water. select Documentation. 7 Zoom in to the plumbing system. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing-Design ➤ 3D Views. right-click 3D Plumbing. right-click Plumbing Isometric . and click Properties. 3 Click Modify Section Boxes tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser In this exercise. Click OK. For Sub-Discipline. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_03_i. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. enter Plumbing Isometric . Under Graphics. right-click Copy of 3D Plumbing. and click to select it.Domestic Water. 4 In the Project Browser. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. In the left pane of the Open dialog.29 Close the file with or without saving it. for View Name. and select the section box. Duplicate a view and specify properties 1 In the Project Browser. The section crop lines no longer display. and click Apply Default View Template. 2 Zoom in. 8 Highlight a segment of the top horizontal piping. For Default View Template.Domestic Water.

and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element. press Tab 3 times. and click to select it. select Dash. For Pattern. 12 Using the same method. and then click OK. select 3. 10 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Weight. 312 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . The selected piping displays as a dashed line. 11 Select the vertical segment of pipe coming off the tankless water heater. Click Apply. change the line weight to 4 and the line pattern to Dash Dot 3/16".9 Right-click.

13 Highlight a segment of horizontal pipe below the sinks. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 313 . as shown). press Tab 3 times (until the entire pipe network highlights. This hides the sanitary piping in order to create a domestic water supply riser isometric view. and click to select it. and click Hide in View ➤ Elements. 14 Right-click.

314 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 16 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. create a sanitary riser isometric view: ■ Duplicate the Plumbing Isometric . Click in the drawing area to start a text label. and click to select it. and rename the new view Plumbing Isometric .15 Press Esc. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. Unhide the sanitary waste piping: ■ ■ ■ ■ On the View Control Bar. ■ ■ ■ Hide domestic cold water and domestic hot water piping. and then click in empty space in the drawing to end the label. On the View Control Bar. press Tab 3 times. click Reveal Hidden Elements.Sanitary Waste. On the View Control Bar. In the drawing area. 17 Label the fixtures as shown. Right-click.Domestic Water view with detailing. 18 Using methods learned previously. click Close Reveal Hidden Elements. and click Unhide in view ➤ Elements. highlight a segment of the sanitary piping.

click on the Format value. as shown. 21 Click OK twice. and then place the callout view on a sheet. for Rounding. Creating Callout Views In this exercise. 23 Click on the horizontal pipe below the sinks to select it.Add a spot slope annotation 19 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Units. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. the callout head on the original view is updated with the sheet information. 22 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Spot Slope. and click to place the spot slope annotation. 20 In the Project Units dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Discipline. When the view is associated with a sheet. select To the nearest 1/8". Creating Callout Views | 315 . you use a plan view to create a callout view. 24 Move the cursor above the pipe. 25 Press Esc twice. verify that Common is selected. For Slope. In the Format dialog.

316 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 5 On the Options Bar. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is highlighted. beginning at the upper left and ending at the lower right. 4 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 7 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ Select the callout boundary. indicating that it’s the active view. select 1/4"=1'-0''. click Training Files. for Scale.rvt. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_04_i. 6 Draw the callout around the ductwork as shown. Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and select Floor Plan from the Type Selector drop-down. and move it to the bottom right corner of the boundary. 2 Zoom in to an office in Area C (the bottom section of the plan). Select the Drag Head control (the control on the leader line that is closest to the callout head).

10 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. ■ Place the view on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser. 11 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog: ■ For the Callout Boundary category. drag it to the sheet. select Callout of Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. 13 In the Project Browser. and click in the empty space at the top center to place it. under Sheets (all). change the line weight for the Callout Leader Line to 5.8 Create an angled leader line by dragging the Drag control located at the center of the leader as shown. Creating Callout Views | 317 . double-click M601 . ■ Expand the Callout Boundary category and. using the same method. for Line Weight. Modify callout boundary line weight 9 Press Esc to clear the selection. Click OK. select 5.HVAC Duct Plan & Sections.

For Default View Template. The display of the ductwork changes from coarse detail to fine. Ductwork in coarse detail 318 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . and click Apply Default View Template. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. enter Callout of Level 1 HVAC WSHP TYP. select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation. 17 In the Project Browser. right-click the callout view. enter WSHP PART PLAN. For Title on Sheet. for View Name.Rename the detail view and modify view settings 14 Zoom to the callout view. 15 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. and select the viewport. Click OK.

Creating Callout Views | 319 . 19 Zoom in to the area near the central stairs and section markers. The detail callout head has been updated with sheet information. 20 Double-click the section head at the left of the stairs to open Room 214 Section.Ductwork in fine detail Create a detail callout 18 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan.

and click OK. and click Apply View Template. 26 In the Rename View dialog. The view is changed to a hidden line display and is moved to its new position in the Project Browser hierarchy. select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation.Design ➤ Detail Views (Detail). right-click the detail view. and click OK. 28 In the Apply View Template dialog. and click Rename. 29 Close the file with or without saving it. enter Typical WSHP Detail. 320 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 23 Draw the callout boundary around the level 1 ductwork as shown. under Names. and select Detail from the Type Selector drop-down. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 27 Right-click Typical WSHP Detail. 24 Double-click the callout head to open the detail view. 22 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel.21 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout. 25 In the Project Browser.

symbols. duct tags. linetypes. ■ create permanent dimensions in a lighting plan so that you can control the location of specific fixtures. ■ work with model-based components. you learn how to: ■ add text notes.Working with Annotations and Dimensions 14 In this lesson. and diffuser tags to an HVAC documentation plan. 321 . and annotation to create a legend.

and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_01_i. 5 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Center).rvt. you work with tag and leader types to create an annotated HVAC documentation plan.Creating Annotations In this exercise. as shown. and select 3/32" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. Add a text note to an HVAC documentation plan 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 322 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . and enter RUN DUCT THROUGH OPEN WEB JOISTS. click Training Files. under Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans. 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. 3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 7 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 2 Zoom in to the offices in the lower right corner of the building in Area C. 6 Click to start the text note in between 2 of the branch ducts serving the perimeter supply air grilles. double-click Level 2 HVAC Duct Plan to make it the active view. 8 With the text still selected. use the drag grips to modify the text box width and position it so that it doesn’t cross the ductwork or wall.

a segment of round duct. 16 In the drawing area. and a segment of rectangular duct. Creating Annotations | 323 . select a supply diffuser. Add diffuser and duct tags by category 14 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 15 On the Options Bar. a return diffuser. as shown. Use the leader segment grips to create horizontal leader segments from the text box. and then click Right Straight. Add leaders 10 Select the text box. 12 Use the leader end grips to drag the arrows to point to the 2 branch ducts. verify that Leader is cleared.9 Press Esc twice. 11 Click Modify Text Notes tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Add Leader: Left Straight. 13 Press Esc to clear the selection.

for Ducts.rfa and Flex Duct Tag Round. click Load. Load tags from library 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel drop-down ➤ Loaded Tags. clear Leader. Tag remaining diffusers 18 Using the same method. and click OK. select Bottom Elevation Duct Tag. If necessary. 17 Click Modify. 22 In the Tags dialog. you can annotate the element with a second tag type. and click Open. 23 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. under Category.rfa. 21 In the Load Family dialog. 20 In the Tags dialog. Place a loaded tag and modify its orientation In order to display additional information about an element. 24 On the Options Bar. 324 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . move diffuser tags off the ductwork.The information on each tag varies according to the category of element. verify that the Loaded Tag is Bottom Elevation Duct Tag. navigate to Annotations ➤ Duct. tag the remaining diffusers in the area.

32 In the drawing area. select the select the large pipe on the right as shown. select the large horizontal segment of rectangular duct and the round duct. Place tags with leaders 28 In the Project Browser. 26 On the Options Bar. specify Tag Orientation as Vertical. 30 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. Leader. select Horizontal. open Documentation ➤ HVAC-Pipe ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan_A. and Attached End. 29 Zoom in to the piping near the stairs in the upper right corner of the building in Area A. and then press Esc. 27 Select the large segment of rectangular duct connected to the WSHP. 31 On the Options Bar. Creating Annotations | 325 . as shown.25 In the drawing area.

as shown. select Free End. for Leader. 34 In the drawing area. 326 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . click the top horizontal pipe in the corridor.33 On the Options Bar. 35 Click above and to the right of the leader start point to place the leader as shown.

for Leader Arrowhead. Creating Dimensions | 327 . and click OK. not simply an instance property. 37 In the drawing area. select Dot Open 1/16". you use temporary dimensions to locate. Edit a tag type You edit the type properties for the pipe size tag so that you can specify a different leader style. lay out. and lock lighting fixtures. tag the bottom horizontal pipe as shown. Notice that the new tags you place use the new style. and the tags placed previously have changed to the new style as well. select the last tag placed.36 Press Esc twice. and all elements of that type are affected. 39 In the Type Properties dialog. Creating Dimensions In this exercise. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. 38 Click Modify Pipe Tags tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. That’s because you changed a type property. 40 Using the method learned previously.

Continue the dimension string using the Edit Witness Lines feature 7 In the drawing area. 6 Press Esc to clear the selection. 9 Select the reference line at the center of the next fixture to the right.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. On the Options Bar. 10 Repeat for the remaining 2 top fixtures. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan_A is highlighted. 12 Press Esc. 328 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 11 Click in any empty space in the drawing area to finish. You can modify the preferred condition for dimension face selection. 3 Select the upper left lighting fixture. 5 Click to create a permanent dimension. select the dimension line. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_02_i. drag the witness line on the right to the face of the wall on the left side of the selected lighting fixture.rvt. 4 Using the Move Witness Line control. click Training Files. 8 Click Modify Dimensions tab ➤ Witness Lines panel ➤ Edit Witness Lines. and then select the interior face of the wall. In the left pane of the Open dialog. notice that Prefer : Wall faces is selected. indicating that it’s the active view. Lay out lighting fixtures using temporary and permanent dimensions 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Zoom in to the left side of the plan.

Creating a Legend | 329 . linework. 20 Close the file with or without saving it. annotation symbols. add dimension strings for the remaining 2 rows of lighting fixtures in the room. the fixtures shift to maintain constraints. Training File ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 16 Press Esc. and notes. and offset them 8' from the wall. Modify dimensions to offset fixtures 17 Select the right lighting fixture in the center line. you create an HVAC Sheet Metal legend using model-based legend components. and press Enter. 19 Using the same methods. lock the dimensions of the interior fixtures for the remaining 2 rows.13 Using the same method. 18 Select the dimension value (7' . enter 8'. click the 3 interior locks on the line. Because the dimensions are locked. 15 To lock the dimensions between the interior fixtures. Creating a Legend In this exercise.3 1/2"). Lock dimensions between fixtures 14 Select the center dimension line.

For Scale. click below the title to place the diffuser. and select 1/4" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. select Air Terminals : Supply Diffuser . 10 Using the same method. Create a legend view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Legends drop-down ➤ Legend.8 Neck.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. 5 Click in the drawing area. 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. Click OK. enter Diffuser Legend. Add model element detail components 7 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Legend Component. place: ■ ■ ■ Air Terminals : Return Diffuser : 24 x 24 Face 12 x 12 Connection Air Terminals : Exhaust Grill : 24 x 24 Face 12 x 12 Connection Air Terminals : Supply Diffuser . select 1/4" = 1' -0". 8 On the Options Bar: ■ For Family. 2 In the New Legend View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. Create a legend title 3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 6 Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. and enter DIFFUSER LEGEND.Sidewall : 18 x 8 330 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . ■ 9 In the drawing area. select Floor Plan. click Training Files. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_03_i.Rectangular Face Round Neck : 24x24 .rvt. For View.

11 Press Esc. 14 In the drawing area. click next to the top diffuser. Add detail component text descriptions 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. 15 Using the same method and using the blue dashed reference lines for alignment. annotate the remaining components: ■ ■ ■ RETURN DIFFUSER EXHAUST GRILL SIDEWALL SUPPLY DIFFUSER 16 Click Modify. and enter SUPPLY DIFFUSER. and select 1/8" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down list. Creating a Legend | 331 .

18 Select the ELEVATION INCLINE . 20 Click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE . 28 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel. and then click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE . select the top and bottom detail lines on the left side of the component. and click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Mirror. 19 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy.Create a legend symbol 17 In the Project Browser. 22 Zoom in to the copied component. 21 Press Esc. and then press Esc. The selected detail lines are now thin. 26 Press Esc. select Thin Lines from the Line Style drop-down.DROP and its text note. 332 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 23 Delete the arrow and the left 3 lines at the center of the component. 29 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Symbol. 25 Select the center reference line as the mirror line.DROP symbol to specify the copy end point.RISE symbol for the copy start point. open HVAC_SM_DUCT_CONDITION legend view. 24 Select the component’s break line. 27 While pressing Ctrl.

33 Click to the left of the left break line. in the Ductwork-Sheet Metal column. 31 Click below the center of the bottom component to place the symbol. mirror the text on the center reference line of the component. 38 Drag Diffuser Legend from the Project Browser to the bottom of the sheet. and then click Modify. 34 Using the method learned previously. and then change the text note to CONNECT NEW DUCT TO EXISTING DUCT. Creating a Legend | 333 .MECHANICAL LEGEND. Place legend views on a sheet 37 In the Project Browser. and then click Modify. enter E. 36 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing.30 Select Spot Elevation . 32 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. double-click Sheets (all) ➤ M100 .Target Filled from the Type Selector drop-down. 35 Change the text on the right to N.

and select No Title from the Type Selector drop-down. 40 Press Esc. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. 334 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions .39 With the viewport still selected. click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel.

click Training Files. 335 . you will create: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A model-based detail of an electrical power riser diagram. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Power Plan ➤ Level 1 Power Plan_B is highlighted. Tag electrical panels 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and text.113 East elevation view. A 3D isometric detail view of a typical WSHP Make Up detail.Detailing 15 In this lesson. A drafting detail by importing a CAD detail. detail groups.rvt. A drafting view using detail components. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail In this exercise. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_01_i. 2 Double-click the right elevation head to open the Power Riser . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. you place elevation views on a sheet and then arrange them as a single view in preparation of creating a one-line diagram. indicating that it’s the active view. A detail callout that references another view.

113 North elevation view from the Project Browser to the empty area at the upper left of sheet E101. 4 On the Options Bar. you place both the North and East elevation views on a sheet. Notice that the software displays a dashed line so that you can align the views as you place them.3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. select each of the 2 panelboards. double-click Sheets (all) ➤ E101 . and click to place it. clear Leader. and then modify and align the views.113 East on the sheet. 336 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 7 Drag the Power Riser . Next. Place views on a sheet 6 In the Project Browser. 8 Using the same method.Electrical Power Riser Diagram to make it the active view. Place the view close to the left edge of the sheet so that there is room in the same space for the east elevation view. place Power Riser . 5 In the drawing area.

Modify level lines 11 In the drawing area. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click Deactivate View.9 Press Esc. 12 Select the Level 1 line. giving the appearance of a single view. Modify a viewport title 14 Select the title of the 113 North view. enter Electrical Power Riser Diagram. and click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Doing this enables you to later drag the 113 East view to the left. select the 113 North view. right-click. and click Activate View. and use the filled circle drag control on the right to drag the end of the level line to the right. 10 Zoom to the power riser elevations on the sheet. 13 Right-click. for Title on Sheet. and click OK. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail | 337 . under Identity Data.

You also create a detail group and annotate the diagram. as shown. 22 Press Esc. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. move the view to the left so that it overlaps the 113 North view. right-click. 20 Select the 113 East elevation view again. 17 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. In the next exercise. You combine views in order to create a one-line diagram. select the 113 East elevation view. 338 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 23 Close the file with or without saving it. Align elevation views to resemble a single view 18 In the drawing area.Remove a viewport title display 16 Select the 113 East view. 19 Select the Level 1 line. and select No Title from the Type Selector drop-down. 21 Using the drag control. Creating Detail Wiring In this exercise. you add wiring to the diagram. right-click. you use detail lines to create wiring for the one-line electrical riser diagram. and click Activate View.

This maximizes the drawing window so that you can more easily add wiring to the riser diagram. Zoom in as necessary and use the drag controls to make sure the lines clean up properly.Electrical Power Riser Diagram is highlighted. draw lines to represent the wiring to the switchboard (SWB). verify that Sheets (all) ➤ E101 . for Name. 8 On the Options Bar. Create a linetype 1 In the Project Browser. notice that there are no snaps active. and then click OK. click Training Files. 2 Close the Project Browser. indicating that it’s the active view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand Lines. 7 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Element panel. Under Modify Subcategories.113 North view. 4 In the Line Styles dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. As you draw.rvt. 3 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Line Styles. select 6. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_02_i. Creating Detail Wiring | 339 . click New. In the Line Styles dialog. Draw linework to create a wiring diagram 5 In the drawing area. verify that Chain is selected. 9 Beginning at the transformer. for Line Weight. and click OK. In the New Subcategory dialog. zoom in to the service transformer (T-SVC) located at the bottom left of the Power Riser . and select Electrical Power from the Type Selector drop-down. enter Electrical Power. 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. as shown.

14 Click to place lines offset to the right and above the first 2 lines from the switchboard.10 Press Esc. 13 On the Options Bar. for Offset. 340 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset. as shown. 11 Using the same method. enter 1/8". add lines to represent wiring between the switchboard and a panel on level 3 (MDP_3).

17 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. 19 Select the horizontal line to the right of the first line. Creating Detail Wiring | 341 . TIP When you use the Trim tool.15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 18 Select the vertical detail line that connects into MDP_2 as the first line to trim. 16 Draw a line to connect the offset line to MDP_2. so that the result is as shown. you select the portion of the line that you want to keep.

342 | Chapter 15 Detailing .20 Continue adding detail lines until the diagram is wired as shown. and then copy them to multiple locations in the diagram. Add a break symbol and note You create the break symbol and text note once. 21 Zoom in to panel MP-1B.

and select 3/32" Arial Transparent from the Type Selector drop-down. 24 Draw a “cap” (the break symbol) over the 3 vertical lines at the top of the panel.22 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. and then click Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: (Center). as shown. Creating Detail Wiring | 343 . The name of the detail arc (Start-End-Radius) indicates the order in which you select the defining points of the arc. 29 Click Modify. 25 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. Copy the symbol and text 30 Select the text. and use the drag controls to resize the text box and position it as shown. 23 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Start-End-Radius Arc). 28 Click above the cap. 26 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ No Leader. and type SEE MECHANICAL CONNECTION SCHEDULE. 27 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel.

select the text and the detail arc of the break symbol. 33 On the Options Bar. 32 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy.31 While pressing Ctrl. select Multiple. 35 Click the endpoint of each of the corresponding lines for the other 2 mechanical panels (MP-2B and MP-3B) as the copy endpoints. 344 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 34 Click the endpoint of the left vertical line under the break symbol as the copy start point.

for Offset. 41 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset. enter 3/32". Create a ground wire You use 3 detail lines to create a ground wire symbol. and then press Esc. You enter exact values for each line length. and press Enter. 40 Press Esc. click to specify the start point of the first horizontal line. 38 Beginning below the level 1 switchboard. 42 On the Options Bar. enter 0 0. 37 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line.36 Press Esc. 39 Move the cursor to the right. 43 Click twice to place 2 more lines below the first line.5. Creating Detail Wiring | 345 .

and press Enter. while pressing Ctrl. 45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down ➤ Project Browser to open the browser view. you can ensure that they stay together.44 Edit the offset lines: ■ ■ ■ Select the middle line. Create a detail group By grouping the lines that represent the ground wire. and click OK. change the length of the bottom line to 0 0. select all 3 lines. expand Groups ➤ Detail.125. 46 In the Project Browser. 47 In the drawing area. enter 0 0.25. 49 In the Create Detail Group dialog. Press Esc. Using the same method. and then press Esc. 48 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group. for Name. enter Ground. click on the length dimension value. You can also specify the origin point of the group so that it is placed accurately. Notice that the new Ground group displays in the Project Browser. 346 | Chapter 15 Detailing . drag the Modify Group Origin control to the midpoint of the top detail line. 50 With the group selected.

56 Draw a detail line to connect each ground wire group to its transformer. 52 Select the detail group.51 Using the method learned previously. 54 Select the group. and then click the endpoint of the detail line as the move end point. TP-2B. draw a detail line that extends from the bottom right of the switchboard. 55 Click below each of the transformers (TP-1B. and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. Creating Detail Wiring | 347 . and TP-3B) to place the ground wire group in those locations. 53 Click the origin of the detail group as the move start point. and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar.

Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail In this exercise. In later exercises.rvt. 58 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin. 348 | Chapter 15 Detailing . you will create the Mechanical Connection Schedule referenced here. 59 Close the file with or without saving it. for Name. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click Orient to View ➤ Sections ➤ Typical Make Up Air. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. click Training Files. and will place it on sheet E01. select the entire Electrical Riser Power Diagram viewport. enter Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail.Pin wires and view You pin the view and all detail lines so that they don’t get moved accidentally. 57 Using a crossing window (beginning at lower left and extending to upper right). 3 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK. Prepare the view 1 In the Project Browser. You use a view template to isolate the mechanical components so that you can annotate the detail components. you duplicate an existing view and orient it to a section view in order to create an isometric detail view. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_03_i. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Duct & Equipment. and click Rename. 2 Right-click the copy. 5 Zoom in to view the section. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 4 Right-click the ViewCube.

and Left sides converge. Back.6 Select the section box. click Home. and then click the corner where the Top. and drag the top grip down so that the section includes only the first floor. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 349 . 7 On the ViewCube. and then press Esc.

and select 3/32" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. Hide elements in a view 10 Select the long rectangular duct at the rear. and click Apply View Template. 9 In the View Templates dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Show Type. Click OK. right-click. You hide this duct because it’s not part of the detail being created. Annotate the view 11 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. Under Names. Walkthroughs. right-click Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. 12 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. This isolates the mechanical components by turning off the architectural components. 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments.Apply a view template 8 In the Project Browser. 350 | Chapter 15 Detailing . select 3D HVAC Iso. select 3D Views.

Enter Makeup Air Duct from AHU-1. 19 Complete the text labels. Move the cursor to the left and click to specify the text insertion point. label the connecting duct 8x8 Makeup Air to Return Plenum (Provide Motorized Damper). as shown. 15 Using the same method. click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: 18 Press Esc. Move the cursor down and to the left. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 351 . and drag the controls to resize the text box as shown. Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Change text alignment 17 With the text still selected. Typical. and click to specify the second leader point. (Right).14 Place the label: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click on the long rectangular duct to start the leader. 16 Select the text for the 8x8 duct.

and then click OK.To rotate and reposition a text label. select Crop Region Visible. Place the view on a sheet 27 In the Project Browser. under Extents. and use the drag controls to position the boundaries around the detail. 22 Zoom out so that the isometric detail and the crop region are both visible. select Crop View and clear Crop Region Visible. as shown. 25 Click OK. open Sheets (all) ➤ M601-HVAC DUCT PLAN & SECTIONS. select the label and use the Drag and Rotate controls that display. 26 Zoom to the drawing extents. and under Extents. 24 Access the instance properties for the view. 28 Drag the new isometric view from the Project Browser onto the sheet. 23 Click on the crop region. 352 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. Modify the view 20 In the drawing area. type VP to open the instance properties for the view.

Drafting Detail Components In this exercise. you can more accurately locate the view in the Project Browser hierarchy. select the isometric view.29 In the drawing area. Drafting Detail Components | 353 . select 3" = 1'-0". and click Properties. Use detail lines to create a detail group. Create a drafting view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Drafting View. 30 Close the file with or without saving it. Annotate the drafting view using keynotes and text notes. Place a detail component. 3 In the Project Browser. Work with a filled region that represents a detail component. enter Typical Floor Drain Detail. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. For Scale.rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_04_i. Click OK. and then select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. right-click the view name. By defining a Sub-Discipline and a View Classification. The new view is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). you: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drafting view.

11 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Rectangle). Notice the new location of the view in the Project Browser. 12 On the Element panel. select Plumbing. for Sub-Discipline. Click OK. 354 | Chapter 15 Detailing . and select Floor Drain with Waterproofing-Section from the Type Selector drop-down. select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down. click the point at the top of the drain. 6 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Element panel. 14 Drag the cursor down and to the left so that the rectangle is 1' 8" x 5 1/2". 9 Zoom in to the component. select Documentation. 13 In the drawing area. For View Classification. 8 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.4 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. 7 Click in the middle of the drawing area to place the component. as the rectangle start point. as shown. Use a filled region to create a concrete slab 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Region drop-down ➤ Region. Place a floor drain detail component 5 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component.

select C.I.P. Drafting Detail Components | 355 . 25 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ 26 Zoom to the lower left corner of the filled region. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog. click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Arrange ➤ Send to Back drop-down ➤ Send to Back. click to select the indicated points in succession from left to right to define the new boundary. 21 In the drawing area. 23 In the drawing area. and click OK. and then press Esc. 20 Select 1. click the bottom left corner of the filled region to specify the group insertion point. Concrete. 18 With the filled region still selected. 24 Click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Edit Boundary.5 NR 18 from the Type Selector drop-down. Modify the boundary of the filled region You edit the boundary of the concrete slab so that it matches the contour of the metal deck. 17 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Region panel ➤ Finish Region. select the filled region.15 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Region Properties. (Line). 27 Using the following illustration as a guide. 22 Click Modify. for Type. Add a structural metal deck detail group 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Group drop-down ➤ Place Detail Group.

35 Draw a line from the end of the last copied boundary line down to the base of the slab. 36 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. select Multiple. 30 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 29 Highlight one of the lines you just drew. 33 Click the endpoint of the copied chain as the start point for the next chain. press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. 34 Press Esc. and then select the base of the slab to the right of the line. 32 Click point 1 to specify it as the start point. and then click to select them.28 Click Modify. 37 Select the small vertical line you just drew. 31 On the Options Bar. and then click point 6 as the endpoint. 356 | Chapter 15 Detailing .

and then select the side of the slab above the line. The boundary of the slab now matches the contour of the metal deck. draw a rectangle on top of the filled region. 44 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ This represents the vinyl composition flooring. 41 Type ZF to zoom out. and then press Esc. 39 Select the line between points 1 and 2. Drafting Detail Components | 357 . 45 Using the method learned previously. (Rectangle). 40 Click Finish Region. 43 Select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down.38 Pan to the other end of the slab. Create a floor component 42 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. as shown.

49 Click Modify. and click OK. for Name. 47 Select Wide Lines from the Line Style drop-down. as shown. select the Flashing Membrane group. enter Flashing Membrane_F. press Tab to highlight the chain. 48 Using the existing thin line as a guide. 52 In the Create Group dialog. 50 Highlight one of the wide lines. Modify the group origin point 53 In the drawing area. draw wide detail lines as shown.Create a detail group 46 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 54 Drag the origin point so that it snaps to the right endpoint of the detail lines. and then click to select them. Notice that the origin point of the group is at the center. 358 | Chapter 15 Detailing .. 51 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group.D.

60 Click the midpoint of the drain to specify the breakline location. 58 Select Break Line from the Type Selector drop-down.55 Press Esc. Drafting Detail Components | 359 . Add breaklines 56 Type ZO to zoom out. as shown. add a breakline at the midpoint of the slab’s left edge. 61 Using the same method. 57 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component. 59 Press Spacebar 3 times to orient the component correctly.

A1 Floor Drain W/O Waterproofing. 64 Press Esc twice. select the keynote and drag the text to the right. 67 On the Options Bar. 68 Select the top of the drain as the object to tag. Add a keynote You begin annotating the detail components by adding a keynote for the floor drain object.62 Press Esc twice. and use the grips to resize the masking region. 360 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 72 If necessary. select Division 22 ➤ 22 13 00 ➤ 22 13 16 ➤ 22 13 16. 65 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Keynote drop-down ➤ User. 70 In the Keynotes dialog. and then click OK. Modify breakline boundaries 63 Select the left breakline. 71 Click Modify. select Leader and Free End. as shown. 66 Select Keynote Text from the Type Selector drop-down. 69 Click twice to place the leader as shown.

79 Enter Adjustable Nickel Bronze Strainer with 4” Flange. 80 Press Esc twice. Drafting Detail Components | 361 . 81 Select the text note.Add text notes You add text notes to continue annotating the view. and click to specify the second leader point. 77 Move the cursor up and to the left. 73 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 75 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Right). and use the drag controls to resize and move the text box as shown. click in the area indicated by the left arrow in the following image. 74 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments. 78 Move the cursor to the left. and then click anywhere in the view to finish editing. 76 To select the leader start point. and click to specify the text insertion point.

82 Continue annotating the detail. click to select the slab lines in the order indicated. 362 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 84 Using the following image as a guide. Add dimensions You add a dimension with multiple references. 83 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned. as shown.

Place the detail on a sheet 86 In the Project Browser. 88 In the drawing area.85 Click to the left of the slab to place the dimension line. and then press Esc twice. Drafting Detail Components | 363 .Plumbing Part Plans & Details. 91 Close the file with or without saving it. select the view title. and click to place it. 89 Select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. 87 Drag Typical Floor Drain Detail from the Project Browser to the top center of the sheet. 90 Press Esc. open P103 .

and modify line weight properties in the imported drawing. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 3 In the Import CAD Formats dialog: ■ Navigate to Training\Imperial\06_Construction Documentation. Click OK. Click Open. For Import units. click Training Files.dwg. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Click Insert tab ➤ Import panel ➤ Import CAD.Importing a CAD Drawing In this exercise. Modify the CAD drawing line weight 5 Zoom to the left side of the detail. select Auto-Detect. you import a CAD detail drawing. and select Roof Drain Overflow Imperial. double-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Plumbing ➤ Drafting Views (Detail) ➤ Roof Drain Overflow Detail to make it the active view. select 3. ■ ■ ■ ■ 4 Type ZF to zoom the view. select Visible. for Line Weight. select Black and White.rvt. For Layers. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_05_i. 7 On the Imported Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Category. 6 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. For A-----NPP. Import a CAD detail drawing 1 In the Project Browser. For Colors. 364 | Chapter 15 Detailing . expand Roof Drains Overflow Imperial.

and then press Esc. 13 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. 15 Close the file with or without saving it. select the viewport title. Place the detail on a sheet 9 In the Project Browser. 11 Press Esc.Plumbing Part Plans & Details. and select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. Importing a CAD Drawing | 365 . 14 Drag the title to the small space below the viewport. 12 In the drawing area. open P103 . 10 Drag Roof Drain Overflow Detail from the Project Browser to the upper right of the sheet.8 Type ZF.

366 .